Mercedes - S Class - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013 (2)

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Thank you for buying Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: Apple® iOS RModel ROrder RCountry variant RAvailability The illustrations in this manual show a lefthand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Android™ Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. RService i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung You can also use the CLA Guide smartphone App: 1175843200Z102 É1175843200Z102^ËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27 Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 39 Opening and closing ........................... 77 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 109 Climate control ................................. 125 Driving and parking .......................... 145 On-board computer and displays .... 213 Stowing and features ....................... 275 Maintenance and care ...................... 289 Breakdown assistance ..................... 305 Wheels and tyres .............................. 325 Technical data ................................... 351 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) .... 68 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) Display message ............................ 260 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 188 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 235 Function/notes ................................ 64 Important safety notes .................... 64 Warning lamp ................................. 265 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .................................... 136 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 130 Active light function ......................... 114 Active Parking Assist Cancelling ...................................... 196 Detecting parking spaces .............. 193 Display message ............................ 253 Exiting a parking space .................. 195 Function/notes ............................. 192 Important safety notes .................. 192 Parking .......................................... 194 Towing a trailer .............................. 197 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72 Adaptive Brake Assist Display message ............................ 243 Function/notes ................................ 66 Adaptive brake lights .......................... 68 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 248 Function/notes ............................. 115 Switching on/off ........................... 116 Additional speedometer ................... 226 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 360 Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 112 Air filter (white display message) .... 251 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Important safety notes .................. 143 Rear ............................................... 144 Setting ........................................... 143 Setting the centre air vents ........... 143 Setting the side air vents ............... 144 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Airbags Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 43 Important safety guidelines ............. 42 Kneebag ........................................... 44 Sidebag ............................................ 44 Triggering ......................................... 41 Windowbag ...................................... 45 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 73 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 73 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 73 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ambient lighting Setting the brightness (on-board computer) ...................................... 227 AMG Performance Seat .......................... 103 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 231 Anti-glare film .................................... 287 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Aquaplaning ....................................... 172 Ashtray ............................................... 284 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 223 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 223 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 296 Hiding a service message .............. 296 Notes ............................................. 295 Index Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 296 Service message ............................ 295 Special service requirements ......... 296 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 73 Function ........................................... 73 Interior motion sensor ..................... 74 Switching off the alarm .................... 73 Tow-away protection ........................ 73 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 225 Display message ............................ 251 Function/notes ............................. 201 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 220 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 248 see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 151 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 150 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 111 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. 158 Automatic drive program ............... 160 Changing gear ............................... 158 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 155 Drive program display .................... 156 Driving tips .................................... 158 Emergency running mode .............. 163 Engaging drive position .................. 157 Engaging neutral ............................ 157 Engaging park position (AMG vehicles) ............................................... 157 Engaging reverse gear ................... 157 Engaging the park position ............ 156 Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients .............................. 158 Kickdown ....................................... 158 Manual drive program .................... 160 Overview ........................................ 155 Problem (fault) ............................... 163 Program selector button ................ 159 Pulling away ................................... 148 Selector lever ................................ 157 Starting the engine ........................ 148 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 160 Trailer towing ................................. 159 Transmission position display ........................................ 156, 157 Transmission positions .................. 157 Automatic transmission emergency running mode ......................... 163 Auxiliary heating Activating/deactivating ................. 138 Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. 139 Display message ............................ 262 Important safety notes .................. 138 Problem (display message) ............ 142 Remote control .............................. 139 Setting ........................................... 229 Setting the departure time ............. 140 Auxiliary ventilation Activating/deactivating ................. 138 Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. 139 Problem (display message) ............ 142 Remote control .............................. 139 Axle load, permissible (trailer towing) ...................................................... 364 B Ball coupling Folding in ....................................... 211 Folding out ..................................... 209 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64 Battery (key) Checking .......................................... 80 Important safety notes .................... 80 Replacing ......................................... 81 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 314 Display message ............................ 250 Important safety notes .................. 312 Jump starting ................................. 316 Belt see Seat belts Belt force limiter Activation ......................................... 50 Function ........................................... 50 5 6 Index Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 41 Function ........................................... 50 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 225 Display message ............................ 253 Notes/function .............................. 203 Trailer towing ................................. 205 Bonnet Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) ............................................... 290 Closing ........................................... 292 Display message ............................ 261 Important safety notes .................. 290 Opening ......................................... 291 Boot Emergency release .......................... 88 Important safety notes .................... 86 Opening (automatically from outside) ................................................. 87 Opening automatically from inside ............................................... 87 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 87 Boot lid Display message ............................ 260 Opening dimensions ...................... 362 Boot load (maximum) ........................ 362 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 241 Notes ............................................. 360 Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 68 Changing bulbs .............................. 120 Display message ............................ 246 Brakes ABS .................................................. 64 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66 BAS .................................................. 64 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 360 Display message ............................ 235 Driving tips .................................... 171 HOLD function ............................... 186 Important safety notes .................. 171 Parking brake ................................ 168 Warning lamp ................................. 265 Breakdown see Flat tyre see Towing away/tow-starting Bulbs see Replacing bulbs C Calling up a fault see Display messages Capacities (technical data) ............... 354 Car see Vehicle Car wash (care) ................................. 297 Care Automatic car wash ....................... 297 Carpets .......................................... 303 Display ........................................... 302 Exhaust pipe .................................. 301 Exterior lighting ............................. 300 Gear or selector lever .................... 302 High-pressure cleaner .................... 298 Interior ........................................... 302 Matt paintwork .............................. 299 Notes ............................................. 297 Paint .............................................. 298 Plastic trim .................................... 302 Reversing camera .......................... 300 Roof lining ...................................... 303 Seat belt ........................................ 303 Seat cover ..................................... 302 Sensors ......................................... 300 Steering wheel ............................... 302 Trim pieces .................................... 302 Washing by hand ........................... 298 Wheels ........................................... 298 Windows ........................................ 299 Wiper blades .................................. 300 Wooden trim .................................. 302 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 229 Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 79 Centre console Lower section .................................. 35 Upper section .................................. 34 Changing bulbs Brake lamps ................................... 120 Index Cornering light function ................. 120 Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 119 Main-beam headlamps ................... 119 Rear foglamp ................................. 120 Reversing lamps ............................ 120 Turn signals (front) ......................... 120 Turn signals (rear) .......................... 120 Child seat Automatic recognition ..................... 53 ISOFIX .............................................. 54 On the front-passenger seat ............ 52 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 62 Recommendations ........................... 59 Suitable positions ............................ 57 Top Tether ....................................... 55 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 62 Rear doors ....................................... 63 Children In the vehicle ................................... 51 Restraint systems ............................ 51 Cigarette lighter ................................ 284 Cleaning Trailer tow hitch ............................. 301 Climate control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 138 Controlling automatically ............... 132 Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ................. 136 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 130 Demisting the windows .................. 134 Demisting the windscreen ............. 134 Important safety notes .................. 126 Indicator lamp ................................ 132 Notes on using THERMATIC automatic climate control ..................... 127 Notes on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control .............. 129 Overview of systems ...................... 126 Problem with the rear window heating .......................................... 136 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 132 Setting the air distribution ............. 133 Setting the air vents ...................... 143 Setting the airflow ......................... 133 Setting the temperature ................ 132 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 136 Switching on/off ........................... 130 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 137 Switching the rear window heating on/off ...................................... 135 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 133 THERMATIC automatic climate control ........................................... 127 THERMOTRONIC (2-zone) automatic climate control ..................... 129 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 28 see Instrument cluster COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating the distance warning function .................. 224 Display message ............................ 235 Operation/notes .............................. 65 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Activating/deactivating ................. 224 Display message ............................ 242 Operation/notes .............................. 67 COMAND Online see separate operating instructions Combination switch .......................... 113 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 217 Convenience closing feature .............. 90 Convenience opening feature ............ 90 Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... 136 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 294 Display message ............................ 249 Important safety notes .................. 360 Temperature (on-board computer) ............................................. 231 Temperature gauge ........................ 214 Warning lamp ................................. 271 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 26 Cornering lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 120 7 8 Index Cornering light function Display message ............................ Function/notes ............................. Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... Cruise control Activation conditions ..................... Cruise control lever ....................... Deactivating ................................... Display message ............................ Driving system ............................... Important safety notes .................. LIM indicator lamp ......................... Selecting ........................................ Setting a speed .............................. Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. Cup holder Centre console .............................. Important safety notes .................. Rear compartment ......................... 245 114 117 174 174 175 255 173 173 174 174 175 174 283 282 283 D Dashboard see Instrument cluster Data see Technical data Daytime driving lights Display message ............................ 248 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 226 Switching on/off (switch) .............. 111 Declarations of conformity ................. 23 Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 228 Interior lighting .............................. 228 Diagnostics connection ...................... 23 Diesel .................................................. 357 Digital speedometer ......................... 218 Dipped-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. 119 Display message ............................ 245 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ 110 Setting for driving on the right/ left ................................................. 227 Switching on/off ........................... 111 DIRECT SELECT lever see Automatic transmission Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 302 Display message Driving systems ............................. 251 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 295 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 234 Engine ............................................ 249 General information ....................... 234 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 234 Key ................................................ 263 Lights ............................................. 245 Safety systems .............................. 235 Tyres .............................................. 256 Vehicle ........................................... 258 Distance recorder see Trip meter Distance warning function Activating/deactivating ................. 224 Function/notes ................................ 65 Warning lamp ................................. 273 DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions ..................... 180 Cruise control lever ....................... 179 Deactivating ................................... 183 Display message ............................ 254 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 184 Driving tips .................................... 184 Function/notes ............................. 178 Important safety notes .................. 178 Selecting ........................................ 179 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 182 Warning lamp ................................. 273 Door Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 229 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 85 Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 79 Control panel ................................... 37 Display message ............................ 261 Emergency locking ........................... 86 Emergency unlocking ....................... 85 Important safety notes .................... 83 Opening (from the inside) ................ 84 Index Drive program Automatic ...................................... 160 Display ........................................... 157 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 156 Manual ........................................... 160 Driver's door see Door Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 297 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 110 Driving on flooded roads .................. 172 Driving safety system COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 67 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 72 Driving safety systems 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ................................................. 68 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 64 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66 Adaptive brake lights ....................... 68 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 64 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 65 Distance warning function ............... 65 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 68 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 68 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 68 Important safety guidelines ............. 64 Overview .......................................... 63 STEER CONTROL ............................. 72 Driving systems Active Parking Assist ..................... 192 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 201 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 203 Cruise control ................................ 173 Display message ............................ 251 Distronic Plus ................................ 178 HOLD function ............................... 186 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 205 Lane package ................................ 203 PARKTRONIC ................................. 188 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 187 Reversing camera .......................... 197 Speed Limit Assist ......................... 202 SPEEDTRONIC ............................... Driving tips Aquaplaning ................................... Automatic transmission ................. Brakes ........................................... DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... Downhill gradient ........................... Driving abroad ............................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... General .......................................... Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... New brake pads/linings ................ Running-in tips ............................... Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical dipped beam ............. Towing a trailer .............................. Wet road surface ........................... DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 175 172 158 171 184 171 110 172 172 172 170 172 172 172 146 329 110 207 171 221 E EASY-VARIO-PLUS system Luggage compartment enlargement .............................................. 279 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 237 Function/notes ................................ 72 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 170 On-board computer ....................... 218 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 151 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 150 Deactivating/activating ................. 151 General information ....................... 150 Important safety notes .................. 150 Introduction ................................... 150 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ................ 23 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) 9 10 Index Emergency key Unlocking the driver's door .............. 85 Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 79 Inserting .......................................... 79 Locking vehicle ................................ 86 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 85 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 349 Important safety notes .................. 349 Removing ....................................... 350 Technical data ............................... 350 Emergency unlocking Boot ................................................. 88 Vehicle ............................................. 85 Engine Display message ............................ 249 ECO start/stop function ................ 150 Engine number ............................... 354 Jump-starting ................................. 316 Running irregularly ......................... 153 Starting problems .......................... 153 Starting the engine with the key .... 148 Stopping ........................................ 167 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 322 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 271 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 352 Problem (fault) ............................... 153 Engine jump starting see Jump starting (engine) Engine oil Additives ........................................ 360 Checking the oil level ..................... 292 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 292 Display message ............................ 250 Filling capacity ............................... 359 Notes about oil grades ................... 359 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 292 Temperature (on-board computer) ............................................. 231 Topping up ..................................... 293 Viscosity ........................................ 360 Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 21 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) 4ETS ................................................ 68 AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 231 Characteristics ................................. 69 Deactivating/activating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 70 Deactivating/activating (except AMG vehicles) ................................ 224 Deactivating/activating (notes; except AMG vehicles) ...................... 69 Display message ............................ 235 ETS .................................................. 68 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 68 Function/notes ................................ 68 General notes .................................. 68 Important safety guidelines ............. 68 Trailer stabilisation .......................... 71 Warning lamp ................................. 267 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 68 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 68 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 301 Exterior lighting Settings options ............................. 110 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 105 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 106 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 230 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 106 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 105 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 106 Parking position ............................. 106 Resetting ....................................... 106 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 107 F Fault message see Display messages Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... 307 First-aid kit ......................................... 306 Index Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ............................... 339 Lowering the vehicle ...................... 339 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 336 Raising the vehicle ......................... 337 Removing a wheel .......................... 339 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 336 Flat tyre MOExtended tyres ......................... 308 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 308 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 309 see Emergency spare wheel Floormat ............................................. 287 Foglamps Extended range .............................. 115 Switching on/off ........................... 111 Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. 352 Two-way radio ................................ 352 Front foglamps Display message ............................ 247 Fuel Additives ........................................ 357 Consumption information .............. 358 Consumption statistics .................. 217 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 218 Displaying the range ...................... 218 E10 ................................................ 356 Fuel gauge ....................................... 30 Grade (petrol) ................................ 356 Important safety notes .................. 355 Low outside temperatures ............. 358 Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 357 Problem (malfunction) ................... 166 Quality (diesel) ............................... 357 Refuelling ....................................... 163 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 355 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 164 Fuel filter (white display message) .. 251 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 218 Gauge .............................................. 30 Fuel reserve see Fuel Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Fuses Allocation chart ............................. Before changing ............................. Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... Important safety notes .................. 355 166 323 323 323 323 322 G Gear indicator (on-board computer) .................................................. 231 Gear or selector lever (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 302 Gearshift program SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 231 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 21 Glove compartment .......................... 277 H Handbrake see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... Display message ............................ Head restraints Adjusting ....................................... Adjusting (electrically) ................... Adjusting (manually) ...................... Adjusting (rear) .............................. Fitting/removing (rear) .................. Headlamp Cleaning system (function) ............ Cleaning system (notes) ................ Headlamps Misting up ...................................... Topping up the cleaning system .... see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners .................... Hill start assist .................................. HOLD function Activating ....................................... 113 262 101 101 101 102 102 114 361 116 295 298 149 186 11 12 Index Deactivating ................................... 186 Display message ............................ 251 Function/notes ............................. 186 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 72 Indicator and warning lamps Coolant .......................................... 271 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 273 Engine diagnostics ......................... 271 SPORT handling mode ................... 268 Indicator lamps Display message ............................ 246 see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Inspection see ASSYST PLUS Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 30 Settings ......................................... 226 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 214 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating ................. 227 Display message ............................ 248 Overview ........................................ 114 Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left .. 227 Interior lighting ................................. 116 Automatic control system .............. 117 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 228 Emergency lighting ........................ 117 Manual control ............................... 117 Overview ........................................ 116 Reading lamp ................................. 116 Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... 227 Interior motion sensor Deactivating ..................................... 74 Function ........................................... 74 Priming ............................................ 74 Switching off .................................... 74 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 54 J Jack Storage location ............................ 307 Using ............................................. 337 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 316 K Key Changing the battery ....................... 81 Checking the battery ....................... 80 Convenience closing feature ............ 90 Convenience opening feature .......... 90 Display message ............................ 263 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 79 Emergency key element ................... 79 Important safety notes .................... 78 Loss ................................................. 82 Modifying the programming ............. 79 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 147 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 82 Starting the engine ........................ 148 Key positions (ignition lock) ............ 147 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 158 Manual drive program .................... 162 Kneebag ............................................... 44 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. Display message ............................ Function/information .................... Lane package ..................................... Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... Lashing eyelets ................................. Licence plate lamp (display message) ................................................... Light sensor (display message) ....... Lighting see Lights Lights Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ 225 252 205 203 232 281 247 248 227 Index Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 228 Active light function ....................... 114 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 111 Cornering light function ................. 114 Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 111 Display message ............................ 245 Driving abroad ............................... 110 Foglamps ....................................... 111 Foglamps (extended range) ........... 115 Hazard warning lamps ................... 113 Headlamp flasher ........................... 113 Headlamp range ............................ 112 Light switch ................................... 110 Main-beam headlamps ................... 113 Motorway mode ............................. 114 Parking lamps ................................ 112 Rear foglamp ................................. 112 Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... 227 Side lamps ..................................... 112 Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 226 Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (switch) ..................... 111 Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ 228 Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... 228 Turn signals ................................... 113 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ 174 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 179 Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 176 Limiting the speed see SPEEDTRONIC Loading guidelines ............................ 276 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 85 Emergency locking ........................... 86 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 84 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... Luggage compartment enlargement ................................................... Luggage net ....................................... Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 229 279 279 102 M M+S tyres ........................................... Main-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. Display message ............................ Switching on/off ........................... Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Manual transmission Engaging reverse gear ................... Gear lever ...................................... Pulling away ................................... Shift recommendation ................... Shifting to neutral .......................... Starting the engine ........................ Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. Media Interface see Separate operating instructions Memory card (audio) ......................... Memory function ............................... Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in sun visor) Mobile phone Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Menu (on-board computer) ............ Notes/placing in the bracket ......... Transmission output (maximum) .... 328 119 247 113 155 154 148 155 155 148 299 221 107 234 352 352 221 286 352 13 14 Index Mobile telephone Pre-installed bracket ...................... 287 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 79 MOExtended tyres ............................. 308 Motorway mode ................................ 114 MP3 Operating ....................................... 221 see Separate operating instructions Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 216 Permanent display ......................... 226 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 215 Overview .......................................... 33 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 219 see separate operating instructions Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 146 O Occupant safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 51 Important safety notes .................... 40 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 46 Odometer ........................................... 217 see Total distance recorder see Trip meter Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 231 Assistance menu ........................... 223 Audio menu ................................... 220 Convenience submenu .................. 230 Display messages .......................... 234 Displaying a service message ........ 296 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 184 Factory setting submenu ............... 231 Heating submenu ........................... 229 Important safety notes .................. 214 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 226 Light submenu ............................... 226 Menu overview .............................. 217 Message memory .......................... 234 Navigation menu ............................ 219 Operating video DVD ..................... 221 Operation ....................................... 215 RACETIMER ................................... 232 Service menu ................................. 225 Settings menu ............................... 225 Standard display ............................ 217 Telephone menu ............................ 221 Trip menu ...................................... 217 Vehicle submenu ........................... 228 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 120 Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ........................... 22 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 23 Important safety note ...................... 22 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 215 Overhead control panel ...................... 36 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 63 P Paint code .......................................... 354 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 298 Panic alarm .......................................... 40 Panorama sliding sunroof Important safety information ........... 91 Opening/closing .............................. 92 Opening/closing the roller sunblind ................................................. 94 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95 Rain closing feature ......................... 93 Resetting ......................................... 94 Parking ............................................... 167 Important safety notes .................. 167 Parking brake ................................ 168 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 106 Reversing camera .......................... 197 see Active Parking Assist see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 192 Index see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 238 Electric parking brake .................... 168 Warning lamp ................................. 270 Parking lamps Display message ............................ 247 Switching on/off ........................... 112 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 191 Driving system ............................... 188 Function/notes ............................. 188 Important safety notes .................. 188 Problem (fault) ............................... 192 Sensor range ................................. 189 Trailer towing ................................. 191 Warning display ............................. 190 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Problem (malfunction) ..................... 62 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp ...................................................... 53 Petrol .................................................. 356 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 302 Power socket Boot ............................................... 286 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Operation ......................................... 46 PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Display message ............................ 243 Program selector button .................. 159 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 21 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 148 Manual transmission ...................... 148 Trailer ............................................ 149 Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 24 R RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 187 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 232 Radar sensor system Activating/deactivating ................. 229 Display message ............................ 252 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 220 see separate operating instructions Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ................ 23 Rain closing feature (panorama sliding sunroof) ................................... 93 Reading lamp ..................................... 116 Rear bench seat Folding the backrest forwards/ back ............................................... 280 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 144 Rear foglamp Changing bulbs .............................. 120 Display message ............................ 247 Switching on/off ........................... 112 Rear lamps see Lights Rear window heating Problem (fault) ............................... 136 Switching on/off ........................... 135 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator ........................................ 49 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 106 Dipping (manual) ........................... 105 Refuelling Fuel gauge ....................................... 30 Important safety notes .................. 163 Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 357 Refuelling process ......................... 164 see Fuel Remote control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 139 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) ......................................... 140 Replacing bulbs Important safety notes .................. 117 Overview of bulb types .................. 118 15 16 Index Removing/replacing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 119 Replacing the battery (auxiliary heating remote control) .................... 140 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 250 Warning lamp ................................. 271 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 137 Restraint system see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Rev counter ........................................ 215 Reverse gear Engaging (manual transmission) .... 155 Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 157 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 300 Function/notes ............................. 197 Switching on/off ........................... 198 Reversing feature Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 92 Roller sunblinds ............................... 93 Side windows ................................... 89 Reversing lamp Changing bulbs .............................. 120 Reversing lamps Display message ............................ 247 Roller sunblind Opening/closing .............................. 94 Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 93 Roof carrier ........................................ 281 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 303 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 362 Route (navigation) see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance (navigation) ............ 219 S Safety Child restraint systems .................... 51 Children in the vehicle ..................... 51 Safety system see Driving safety systems Seat Adjusting (Performance Seat) ........ 103 Folding the backrest (rear compartment) forwards/back .............. 280 Seat belt Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 230 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 48 Adjusting the height ......................... 48 Belt force limiter .............................. 50 Belt tensioner .................................. 50 Cleaning ......................................... 303 Display message ............................ 243 Fastening ......................................... 48 Important safety guidelines ............. 46 Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 49 Releasing ......................................... 49 Warning lamp ................................. 263 Warning lamp (function) ................... 49 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 100 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 102 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 101 Cleaning the cover ......................... 302 Correct driver's seat position ........... 98 Important safety notes .................... 99 Seat heating problem .................... 104 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 107 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 103 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 300 Service see ASSYST PLUS Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 225 Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 360 Coolant (engine) ............................ 360 Engine oil ....................................... 359 Fuel ................................................ 355 Important safety notes .................. 354 Washer fluid ................................... 361 Index Setting the air distribution ............... 133 Setting the airflow ............................ 133 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 231 On-board computer ....................... 225 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 231 Shifting to neutral (manual transmission) ............................................. 155 Side lamps Switching on/off ........................... 112 Side windows Convenience closing ........................ 90 Convenience opening ...................... 90 Important safety notes .................... 88 Opening/closing .............................. 89 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91 Resetting ......................................... 90 Sidebag ................................................ 44 Sliding sunroof see Panorama sliding sunroof Snow chains ...................................... 329 Socket Points to observe before use ......... 285 Sockets Centre console .............................. 285 Rear compartment ......................... 285 Specialist workshop ............................ 24 Spectacles compartment ................. 277 Speed Limit Assist Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... 223 Display message ............................ 251 Display message in the multifunction display .................................... 203 Function/notes ............................. 202 Important safety notes .................. 202 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 226 Digital ............................................ 218 In the Instrument cluster ................. 30 Segments ...................................... 215 Selecting the unit of measurement .............................................. 226 see Instrument cluster SPEEDTRONIC Deactivating variable ..................... 177 Display message ............................ 255 Function/notes ............................. 175 Important safety notes .................. 176 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 176 Permanent ..................................... 177 Selecting ........................................ 176 Storing the current speed .............. 177 Variable ......................................... 176 SPORT handling mode Activating/deactivating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 70 Warning lamp ................................. 268 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Display message ............................ 244 Introduction ..................................... 41 Warning lamp ................................. 270 Warning lamp (function) ................... 41 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 147 STEER CONTROL .................................. 72 Steering (display message) .............. 261 Steering wheel Adjusting (manually) ...................... 104 Button overview ............................... 33 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 215 Cleaning ......................................... 302 Gearshift paddles ........................... 160 Important safety notes .................. 104 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 160 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 232 Stowage areas ................................... 276 Stowage compartments Armrest (front) ............................... 278 Armrest (under) ............................. 278 Centre console .............................. 277 Centre console (rear) ..................... 279 Cup holder ..................................... 282 Glove compartment ....................... 277 Important safety information ......... 276 Luggage net ................................... 279 Spectacles compartment ............... 277 Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 278 17 18 Index Stowage well beneath the boot floor .................................................... Summer tyres .................................... Sun visor ............................................ Supplemental restraint system see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Surround lighting (on-board computer) .................................................. 281 328 283 228 T Tail lamps Display message ............................ 246 see Lights Tank see Fuel tank Technical data Emergency spare wheel ................. 350 Information .................................... 352 Trailer loads ................................... 364 Tyres/wheels ................................. 340 Vehicle data ................................... 362 Telephone Accepting a call ............................. 222 Display message ............................ 262 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 221 Number from the phone book ........ 222 Redialling ....................................... 222 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 222 Telephone compartment ................ 278 Temperature Coolant .......................................... 214 Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 231 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 231 Outside temperature ...................... 215 Setting (climate control) ................ 132 TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. 173 Theft-deterrent system ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 73 Immobiliser ...................................... 72 Through-loading ................................ 279 Through-loading feature ................... 279 Time see Separate Owner's manual Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 232 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 309 Top Tether ............................................ 55 Tow-away protection Activating ......................................... 73 Deactivating ..................................... 73 Function ........................................... 73 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 322 Fitting the towing eye .................... 320 Important safety notes .................. 318 Removing the towing eye ............... 320 Towing Important safety notes .................. 318 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 321 Towing a trailer Active Parking Assist ..................... 197 Axle load, permissible .................... 364 Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps ............................................. 212 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 71 Pulling away with a trailer .............. 149 Trailer tow hitch display message .. 261 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 320 Removing the towing eye ............... 320 With both axles on the ground ....... 321 With front axle raised ..................... 320 Trailer coupling see Towing a trailer Trailer towing 7-pin connector ............................. 212 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 205 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 301 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 210 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 210 Driving tips .................................... 207 Folding in the ball coupling ............ 211 Folding out the ball coupling .......... 209 Important safety notes .................. 207 Lights display message .................. 245 Mounting dimensions .................... 363 Parktronic ...................................... 191 Power supply ................................. 211 Trailer loads ................................... 364 Transmission see Automatic transmission see Manual transmission Index Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... Transporting the vehicle .................. Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. Trip meter Calling up ....................................... Resetting (on-board computer) ...... Turn signals Changing bulbs (front) ................... Changing bulbs (rear) .................... Switching on/off ........................... Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Transmission output (maximum) .... Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tyre pressure loss warning General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tyres Changing a wheel .......................... Checking ........................................ Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. M+S tyres ...................................... MOExtended tyres ......................... Replacing ....................................... 335 Service life ..................................... 327 Storing ........................................... 336 Summer tyres ........................ 172, 328 Tyre size (data) .............................. 340 Tyre tread ...................................... 327 Wheel and tyre combinations ........ 342 see Flat tyre 156 321 302 217 217 218 120 120 113 352 352 352 332 256 332 311 311 330 331 331 332 333 332 332 332 334 274 334 335 327 336 256 326 328 328 U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 85 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 84 V Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 284 Variable SPEEDTRONIC see SPEEDTRONIC Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 24 Data acquisition ............................... 25 Electronics ..................................... 352 Equipment ....................................... 22 Implied warranty .............................. 25 Individual settings .......................... 225 Leaving parked up ......................... 169 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 86 Locking (key) ................................... 79 Lowering ........................................ 339 Pulling away ................................... 148 Raising ........................................... 337 Registration ..................................... 24 Securing from rolling away ............ 336 Tow-starting ................................... 318 Towing away .................................. 318 Transporting .................................. 321 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 85 Unlocking (key) ................................ 79 Vehicle data ................................... 362 Vehicle data ....................................... 362 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 362 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 86 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 354 19 20 Index Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle tool kit .................................. Vehicle weights ................................. Video (DVD) ........................................ Video DVD (on-board computer) ...... VIN ...................................................... 307 362 221 221 354 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 265 Brakes ........................................... 265 Distance warning signal ................. 273 ESP® ............................................. 267 ESP® OFF ...................................... 268 Fuel tank ........................................ 271 LIM (cruise control) ........................ 174 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 179 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 176 Overview .......................................... 32 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 53 Reserve fuel ................................... 271 Seat belt ........................................ 263 SRS ................................................ 270 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 274 Warning triangle ................................ 306 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 262 Wheel and tyre combinations see Tyres Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 339 Wheel chock ...................................... 336 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 335 Changing/replacing ....................... 335 Checking ........................................ 327 Cleaning ......................................... 298 Cleaning (warning) ......................... 336 Emergency spare wheel ................. 349 Fitting a new wheel ........................ 339 Fitting a wheel ............................... 336 Important safety notes .................. 326 Removing a wheel .......................... 339 Storing ........................................... 336 Tightening torque ........................... 339 Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 340 Windowbag Display message ............................ 245 Operation ......................................... 45 Windows Cleaning ......................................... 299 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...................................... 134 Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Notes ............................................. 361 Topping up ..................................... 295 Windscreen wipers Display message ............................ 262 Problem (malfunction) ................... 124 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 122 Switching on/off ........................... 121 Winter driving General notes ................................ 328 Winter operation Slippery road surfaces ................... 172 Snow chains .................................. 329 Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. 228 M+S tyres ...................................... 328 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 300 Important safety notes .................. 122 Replacing (windscreen) .................. 122 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 302 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 133 Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consideration. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ryour short trips, as these increase fuel consumption. Robserve the correct tyre pressure. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the vehicle. Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rall maintenance work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Returning an end-of-life vehicle EU countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your old vehicle to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants available. You can return your vehicle to these plants free of charge. This makes a valuable contribution to the recycling process and the conservation of resources. For further information on recycling old vehicles, recovery and the terms of the policy, visit the Mercedes-Benz homepage. Ravoid Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Rdoor Z 21 22 Introduction Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case: Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rif other road users could be endangered Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely affected Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine MercedesBenz parts (Y page 354). Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should kept in the vehicle. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Introduction G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could effect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly any more and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Always have work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If, upon continuing your journey, you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves: The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Electromagnetic compatibility Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed for. The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation ECE-R 10. Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 23 24 Introduction G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it can affect the operation of the vehicle systems. This may affect the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety and maintenance work Rservice Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conversions Rwork on electronic components Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases: Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual technical data in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rthe Introduction Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Data stored in the vehicle A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Revents Rfaults In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognising and rectifying faults and defects Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimise vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and fault data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services processes Rwarranty events Rquality assurance It is read by employees of the service network (including manufacturers) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the fault memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorised expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Rservice Raccident reports to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. Rdamage Z 25 26 Introduction Copyright information General notes Information on licences for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource 27 Cockpit ................................................. 28 Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33 Centre console .................................... 34 Overhead control panel ...................... 36 Door control panel .............................. 37 At a glance Instrument cluster .............................. 30 28 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel gearshift paddles 160 ; Combination switch 113 = Instrument cluster 30 ? Horn A DIRECT SELECT lever 155 B PARKTRONIC warning display C Overhead control panel Function Page D Climate control systems 126 E Ignition lock 147 F Adjusts the steering wheel 104 G Cruise control lever 174 H Electric parking brake 168 I Light switch 110 188 J Diagnostics connection 36 K Opens the bonnet 23 291 29 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Overhead control panel ; PARKTRONIC warning display 188 = Combination switch 113 ? Instrument cluster 30 A Horn B DIRECT SELECT lever 155 C Steering wheel gearshift paddles 160 36 Function Page D Light switch 110 E Electric parking brake 168 F Opens the bonnet 291 G Diagnostics connection H Ignition lock 147 I Adjusts the steering wheel 104 J Cruise control lever 174 K Climate control systems 126 23 30 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Displays and controls i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Function Page : Speedometer with segments 215 ; Multifunction display 216 = Rev counter 215 ? Coolant temperature A Fuel gauge B Instrument cluster lighting Page 214 214 31 At a glance Instrument cluster i Instrument cluster: miles Function Function Page : Speedometer with segments 215 ; Multifunction display 216 = Rev counter 215 ? Coolant temperature A Fuel gauge B Instrument cluster lighting Page 214 214 32 Instrument cluster At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function Page : L Dipped-beam headlamps 111 ; T Side lamps 112 = K Main-beam headlamps 113 ? ÷ ESP® 267 A ! Electric parking brake (red) 270 B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 270 C · Distance warning 273 D #! Turn signals 113 E 6 SRS 270 F ü Seat belt 263 Function G % Diesel engine: preglow M SPORT handling mode in AMG vehicles Page 148 268 H ? Coolant 271 I R Rear foglamp 112 J N Foglamps 111 K ; Engine diagnostics 271 L h Tyre pressure monitor 274 M æ Reserve fuel 271 N å ESP® OFF 267 O ! ABS 265 P J Brakes 265 Multifunction steering wheel 33 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio/COMAND display; see the separate operating instructions = ? Switches on LINGUATRONIC, see the separate operating instructions ? ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute Page 216 Function A B 221 =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms the selection Hides display messages % Back Switches off LINGUATRONIC, see the separate operating instructions Page 215 215 215 234 215 34 Centre console At a glance Centre console Centre console, upper section Function Page : Audio system/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions ; c Seat heating 103 = c PARKTRONIC 188 ? ¤ ECO start/stop function 150 A £ Hazard warning lamps 113 Function Page B 4 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 53 C Ú Selects the drive program å AMG vehicles: ESP® 159 70 D & Auxiliary heating 138 Centre console 35 At a glance Centre console, lower section i Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever Function : ; Function Page Page = Cup holders 282 Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket Stowage compartment 284 284 285 276 ? Stowage compartment with Media Interface 276 A Stowage compartment 276 Audio/COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions 36 Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 117 ; p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 116 = | Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off 117 ? ë Deactivates towaway protection A Rear-view mirror 73 105 Function Page B ê Deactivates the interior motion sensor 74 C Spectacles compartment 277 D 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof with roller sunblinds 92 E c Switches the front interior lighting on 117 F p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 116 Door control panel 37 At a glance Door control panel Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 84 B ; % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle W Opens/closes the side windows 89 84 C = r45= Saves the seat and exterior mirror settings 107 n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 63 ? Adjusts the seats electrically o Opens the boot 87 100 A 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 105 D 38 39 Useful information .............................. 40 Panic alarm .......................................... 40 Occupant safety .................................. 40 Driving safety systems ....................... 63 Anti-theft systems .............................. 72 Safety Children in the vehicle ........................ 51 Occupant safety 40 Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Safety els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 24). Panic alarm more. The restraint systems could then no longer protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do and could fail in the event of an accident or activate unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify parts of the restraint systems. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. The airbag system can be adapted for a person with disabilities. For further information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The seat belts, together with SRS (Supplemental Restraint System), are complementary, co-ordinated restraint systems (Y page 41). They reduce the risk of injury in specific, pre-defined types of accident situations and thereby increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. To ensure that the restraint systems can deliver their full potential protection, make sure that: Rthe To activate: press ! button : for approximately one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X i The panic alarm function is only available in certain countries. Occupant safety Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint systems could result in them not functioning properly any seat and head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 98) Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly (Y page 46) Rthe airbags can inflate properly if they are deployed (Y page 42) Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly (Y page 104) Rthe restraint systems have not been modified An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. However, airbags are only an additional restraint system that complements, but does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly at all times, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbags. The airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. For example, if the protective capacity of correctly fastened seat belts is not increased by deploying the airbags, the airbags will not deploy. Airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly. The seat belt helps, firstly, to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag. Secondly, in a head-on collision, for example, the seat belt restricts movement of the vehicle occupant towards the point of impact. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Introduction Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp Rairbags Rairbag control unit (with crash sensors) tensioners for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear Rseat belt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear SRS reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. Rbelt SRS warning lamp G WARNING If SRS is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Have SRS checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. The SRS components are in operational readiness when the 6 SRS warning lamp goes out while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred if: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp does not go out after a few seconds Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up again Triggering of belt tensioners and airbags During the first stage of a collision, the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rmagnitude Based on the evaluation of this data, the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers the belt tensioners in the first stage. If there is an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front airbags are also deployed. Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the event of a collision. In the first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The belt tensioner and airbag triggering thresholds are variable and are adapted to the detected rate of deceleration or acceleration of the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering process must take place in good time at the start of the collision. Z 41 Safety Occupant safety 42 Occupant safety The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Safety Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly, e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. i The front belt tensioners can only be triggered if the seat belt tongues on the front seats are correctly engaged in the seat belt buckles. i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is determined by predicting the severity of the accident, especially vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the type of accident: Rhead-on collision impact Roverturn Rside Airbags Important safety notes G WARNING Airbags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. Observe the following notes to reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag deployment: Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, pregnant women – must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and lean back against the backrest, which should be positioned as close to the vertical as possible. The head restraint must support the back of the head at about eye level. Ralways secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suitable child restraint systems. Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The driver's chest should be as far away from the centre of the driver's airbag cover as possible. Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. This is especially important if you have secured a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their head into the area of the window in which the sidebag/windowbag is deployed. Rrearward-facing child restraint systems must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat unless the front-passenger airbag has been disabled. On the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled if a child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front-passenger seat in a vehicle equipped with automatic child seat recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG Occupant safety G WARNING If you modify the airbag covers or affix objects, e.g. stickers to them, the airbags may no longer function as intended. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the airbag covers and do not affix any objects to them. G WARNING After the driver's airbag has been deployed, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Airbag deployment slows down and restricts the movement of the vehicle occupants. If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The powder may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. The airbag installation locations are identified by the AIRBAG symbol. i After an airbag has been deployed, have the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified specialist workshop, even if your vehicle can still be driven. Front airbags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced. Z Safety OFF indicator lamp must be continuously lit. If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition, or your rearward-facing child restraint system does not have a transponder for automatic child seat recognition, children must be secured in a child restraint system on a suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharpedged objects in the pockets of clothing. Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of the driver's/front-passenger front airbag, particularly when the vehicle is in motion. Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. You could be injured if the airbag is deployed and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. Rmake sure that there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the area where the airbags are deployed. Rdo not place any objects between the seat backrest and the door. Rdo not hang any hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, to the doors. It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury being caused by an airbag, due to the high speed at which the airbag must be deployed. 43 44 Occupant safety If a child restraint system is fitted to the frontpassenger seat and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is not lit: child restraint system without a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted or Ra child restraint system with a transponder has been fitted incorrectly Safety Ra Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. The front airbags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest. They are deployed: Driver's kneebag Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction. Rif the system determines that airbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Rindependently of other airbags in the vehicle. The time within which the front airbag is deployed is dependent on whether or not a seal belt is worn. If the vehicle overturns, the front airbags are generally not deployed. Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: frontpassenger front airbag ; is only enabled if the system determines that the frontpassenger seat is occupied. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is not lit (Y page 53). Driver's kneebag : deploys underneath the steering column. The driver's kneebag is triggered together with the front airbag. The driver's kneebag is designed to operate together with the front airbags in frontal impacts if certain thresholds are exceeded. The driver's kneebag operates best in conjunction with correctly positioned and fastened seat belts. Driver's kneebag : increases the driver's protection against: Rknee injuries injuries Rlower leg injuries Rthigh Sidebags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. Operation of the automatic child seat recog- nition may also be impaired. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door panelling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags. Otherwise, the sidebags cannot deploy correctly and therefore cannot provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; deploy next to the outer seat cushions. When deployed, the sidebags offer additional protection of the thorax for occupants on the front seats as well as of the pelvis for the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms The sidebags are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rindependently of the belt tensioners Rindependently of the front airbags If the vehicle overturns, the sidebags are generally not deployed. Sidebags are deployed if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that sidebag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belts. Windowbags Windowbags : enhance the level of protection for the head (but not chest or arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. Windowbags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. Z 45 Safety Occupant safety Safety 46 Occupant safety Windowbags are deployed: Function Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of PRE-SAFE® intervenes: lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Ron the side on which an impact occurs Ron the driver's and the front-passenger's side if the vehicle overturns and the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rindependently of the front airbags PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Introduction PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when moving the seat back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRESAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated. Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely. Ron vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: when adaptive Brake Assist intervenes powerfully. PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. the vehicle skids, the panorama sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. Rvehicles with the memory function: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavourable position. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belts are not released: Rif X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but only when the vehicle is stationary. Seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about seat-belt adjustment can be found under "Seat-belt adjustment" (Y page 48). Seat belts Important safety notes G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Therefore, make sure that all occupants — in particular, pregnant women — wear their seat belts correctly at all times. RThe seat belt must fit snugly on your body and must not be twisted. Therefore, avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. The shoulder section of the belt must be routed across the centre of your shoulder — on no account across your neck or under your arm — and pulled tight against your upper body. The lap belt must always pass across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints — not across your abdomen. If necessary, push the seat belt slightly downwards and adjust it by pulling it in the direction the seat belt retracts. RDo not route the seat belt strap over sharp or fragile objects. Please make sure that such objects are not on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens or keys etc. The seat belt strap could become damaged and tear during an accident and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Children must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. The child will not be secured in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden change of direction. This may result in the child or other occupants being seriously or fatally injured. RPersons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially designed, suitable restraint systems. RChildren under 1.50 m tall and younger than twelve years of age cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason secure them in special suitable child restraint systems installed on a suitable seat. Additional information can be found in the Operating Instructions in the chapter "Safety", "Children in the Vehicle". Observe the installa- tion instructions of the child restraint system manufacturer. RDo not secure an object with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if the backrest is not in the upright position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in the upright position. G WARNING Seat belts cannot perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, bleached or coloured, or are very dirty Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or very dirty Rmodifications have been made to the seat belt tensioners or belt anchorages In the event of an accident, seat belts can sustain damage that is not visible to the naked eye, e. g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified belt tensioners could deploy unexpectedly or fail. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never make modifications to seat belts, belt tensioners, belt anchorages or seat belt retractors. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, are not worn and are clean. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. Seat belts are the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occuZ 47 Safety Occupant safety Occupant safety 48 pants in the event of an accident. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. Safety Fastening seat belts Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Ryou Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 98). X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sash guide :. X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your pelvis. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Seat belt adjustment: if necessary, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body (Y page 48). X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height (Y page 48). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X Information on releasing the seat belt with release button ? (Y page 49). engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 230). The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about PRE-SAFE® can be found in the "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection)" section (Y page 46). Belt height adjustment You can adjust the belt height for the front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that allows the upper part of the seat belt to be routed across the centre of your shoulder. To raise: slide the belt guide upwards. The belt guide will engage in various positions. X To lower: hold belt guide release : and slide the belt guide downwards. X Let go of belt guide release : in the desired position and make sure that the belt guide engages. X Releasing the seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases once the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. Only for certain countries: the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after every engine start. It lights up regardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fastened. If the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp then goes out. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" (Y page 263). Rear seat belt status indicator Example: rear seat belt status indicator X X Press release button ? on belt buckle =. Guide belt tongue ; back to belt guide :. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder for all occupants to fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, a warning tone may sound. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator shows the rear seat on which the belt is fastened. In the example, the occupant on the right rear seat, when viewed in the direction of travel, is secured. The ü symbol in the display indicates a fastened seat belt. If a seat belt is not fastened or if a seat is not occupied, the ý symbol is displayed. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator appears in the multifunction display for around 30 seconds if: Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approximately 10 km/h. Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten their seat belts while the vehicle is in motion. Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and the vehicle drives off again. Z 49 Safety Occupant safety 50 Occupant safety You can also cancel the rear seat belt status indicator immediately (Y page 234). Safety i The status indicator for the rear-compart- ment seat belts is only available for certain countries. Belt tensioners, belt force limiters G WARNING Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occu- pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident. i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: an electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. The front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners and belt force limiters. The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. The belt tensioners can only be activated when: Rthe ignition is switched on restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp 6" (Y page 41) Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective front seat Rthe The belt tensioners on the outside seats in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. The belt tensioners are triggered depending on the accident type and severity: Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end collision if the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction on the side opposite to the impact Rin certain situations where the vehicle overturns and the system determines that it can provide additional protection If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The powder may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced. The belt force limiters on the front seats are synchronised with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This results in the load being distributed over a greater area. Children in the vehicle Child restraint systems Important safety notes G WARNING To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: RChildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on a suitable vehicle seat. This is necessary because the seat belts are not designed for children. RDo not transport children who are secured in rearward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. Exception: if the vehicle is equipped with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat and the child is secured in a child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recognition RIf you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. When doing so, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. Set the belt height adjustment so that the belt strap is routed towards the front along the bottom. RChildren must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Due to the forces which occur in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident, it would not be possible to restrain the child. The child could be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously or even fatally injured. G WARNING tive function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always fit child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident cannot perform their intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system again. If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protecZ 51 Safety Children in the vehicle 52 Children in the vehicle G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Safety Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of parking position P. Rshift the manual transmission into neutral. Rstart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rshift G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure the child using a child restraint system which is appropriate to the size, age and weight of the child. In order to correctly secure the child in the child restraint system, always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You should preferably fit the restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Make sure that the child is secured for the trip. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use the listed child restraint systems (Y page 59). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems. You can obtain information about this at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat G WARNING If the front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Ra child secured in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat could be seriously or even fatally injured by the frontpassenger airbag deploying. This is especially a risk if the child is in the immediate vicinity of the front-passenger front airbag when it deploys. Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Only secure a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rand you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. When doing so, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. Set the belt height adjustment so that the belt strap is routed towards the front along the bottom. Children in the vehicle Ron vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat Ron vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, unless a child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front-passenger seat Ron vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, if the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit. To make you aware of this danger, a corresponding warning sticker has been affixed to the side of the dashboard and on both sides of the sun visor on the front-passenger side. Information about recommended child restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat G WARNING If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up when the child restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger front airbag has not been disabled. If the frontpassenger front airbag deploys, the child could be seriously or even fatally injured. Proceed as follows: Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rfit or Ronly Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor use a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. When doing so, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. Set the belt height adjustment so that the belt strap is routed towards the front along the bottom. Rhave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions/communicates correctly, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could lead to injuries. Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system Z Safety The front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: 53 54 Children in the vehicle Safety G WARNING Electronic devices on the front-passenger seat can affect the function of the automatic child seat recognition, for example: Rlaptop Rmobile phone cards such as ski passes or access passes The front-passenger front airbag could deploy unintentionally or not function as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any of the devices mentioned above or similar devices on the frontpassenger seat. Rtransponder : PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp The sensor system for child restraint systems in the front-passenger seat detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted. In this case, PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp : lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. i If the front-passenger front airbag is dis- abled by the automatic child seat recognition, the following remain enabled on the front-passenger side: Rthe sidebag windowbag Rthe belt tensioner Rthe If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle is not equipped with automatic child seat recognition, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the frontpassenger door. Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: if you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up briefly. However, the indicator lamp has no function. It does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat. ISOFIX child seat securing system for the rear seats G WARNING ISOFIX child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 22 kg who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. The child could, for example, not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use ISOFIX child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Children in the vehicle G WARNING The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. The child could be seriously or even fatally injured. For this reason, when securing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. For safety reasons, on the rear seats use only child restraint systems with an ISOFIX child seat securing system which have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. When fitting the child restraint system, always make sure that it is engaged correctly in the ISOFIX securing rings on both sides. ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. ISOFIX securing rings : for two ISOFIX child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right of the rear seats. Safety When installing a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. Top Tether Important safety notes G WARNING Always engage the rear seat backrests in an upright position before installing the Top Tether belt. Push and pull the rear seat backrests to check whether they are engaged correctly. The rear seat backrest may fold down if it is not engaged correctly. The child restraint system is then no longer supported correctly or held in position and can no longer perform its intended function. This can cause serious or even fatal injuries. ! When fitting the ISOFIX child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the centre seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be damaged. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on both ISOFIX securing rings :. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing the ISOFIX child restraint system. 55 Example: Top Tether belt with one belt strap Top Tether provides an additional connection between the ISOFIX child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It Z Safety 56 Children in the vehicle helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is fitted with Top Tether, this should always be used. The Top Tether anchorage points are fitted in the rear compartment behind the outer head restraints on the parcel shelf. X Press down the rear of cover ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover ; is raised slightly at the front. X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route Top Tether belt A centrally over head restraint :. X Top Tether belt with two belt straps: route Top Tether belts A on the left and right past the side of head restraint :. X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether anchorage =. X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is tight. Vehicles for Australia: there is an additional Top Tether anchorage point behind the central rear seat. Children in the vehicle 57 Only child restraint systems which are approved in accordance with the ECE standard ECE R44 are permitted for use in the vehicle. Suitability of the seats for attaching belted child restraint systems Key to the letters used in the table: X U Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 59). Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Seat positions Weight catego- Front-passenger seat ries FrontFrontpassenger passenger front airbag is front airbag is not disabled disabled Rear seat1 Left, right Centre Category 0: up to 10 kg X L2, 3 U, L U, L4 Category 0+: up to 13 kg X L2, 3 U, L U, L4 UF3, L3 U, L U, L4 Category I: 9 to UF3, L3 18 kg If you use a baby car seat from category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system from category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the rearward-facing child restraint. 2 Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system from the "Universal" category with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 3 Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. Set the belt height adjustment so that the belt strap is routed towards the front along the bottom. Move the front-passenger seat to the highest position and move the backrest to an almost vertical position. When doing so, ensure that the complete surface of the child restraint system rests against the backrest of the front-passenger seat and that the child restraint system does not touch the roof. To do so, you may have to adjust the backrest down a little. For seats with electrical adjustment, the seat cushion angle must be set to the highest and most upright position. 4 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat. 1 Z Safety Suitable positioning of the child restraint systems Children in the vehicle 58 Safety Seat positions Weight catego- Front-passenger seat ries FrontFrontpassenger passenger front airbag is front airbag is not disabled disabled Rear seat1 Left, right Centre Category II: 15 to 25 kg UF3, L3 U3, L3 U, L X Category III: 22 to 36 kg UF3, 5, L3, 5 UF3, 5, L3, 5 U, L5 X Example: approval label on the child restraint system "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label and the text "Universal". "Universal" category child restraint systems can be used on the seats indicated with U, UF or IUF according to the tables "Suitability of the seats for attaching belted child restraint systems" or "Suitability of the seats for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system". Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "Semi-universal" on the approval label. These can be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems If you use a baby car seat from category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system from category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the rearward-facing child restraint. 3 Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. Set the belt height adjustment so that the belt strap is routed towards the front along the bottom. Move the front-passenger seat to the highest position and move the backrest to an almost vertical position. When doing so, ensure that the complete surface of the child restraint system rests against the backrest of the front-passenger seat and that the child restraint system does not touch the roof. To do so, you may have to adjust the backrest down a little. For seats with electrical adjustment, the seat cushion angle must be set to the highest and most upright position. 5 For certain child restraint systems in this weight category, this can mean that the area of use is restricted as the maximum size setting of the child restraint system is not possible due to possible contact with the roof. 1 Children in the vehicle 59 Key to the letters used in the table: ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category, which are approved for use in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 59). The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For this, your vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right1 Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months E ISO/R1 IL 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months E ISO/R1 IL D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL6, 7 I: 9 to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL6, 7 B ISO/F2 IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF A ISO/F3 IUF Recommended child restraint systems When installing a child restraint system without a transponder for automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: X Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. If you use a baby car seat from category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system from category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the rearward-facing child restraint. 6 Vehicles with the Style or Urban package or 4-way or 6-way front seats: set the front seat to the highest position. 7 Vehicles with 2-way front seats: set the front seat to the foremost position. 1 Z Safety X 60 Children in the vehicle Safety If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. Set the belt height adjustment so that the belt strap is routed towards the front along the bottom. Weight catego- Manufacries turer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order num- Automatic ber child seat (A 000 ...) recognition Colour code: 9H95 Category 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus 03 301146 04 301146 970 10 00 BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 Category 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus 03 301146 04 301146 970 10 00 BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 Category I: 9 to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years Britax Römer DUO plus 03 301133 04 301133 970 11 00 Yes 970 16 00 No 04 301133 970 21 00 Yes Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg between approximately 4and 12 years Britax Römer 04 301198 970 18 00 Yes 970 19 00 No 970 22 00 Yes KIDFIX Yes Yes Suggested "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems: Weight categories Size category Manufacturer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order number Colour code: 9H95 Automatic child seat recognition Carry-cot F – – – – – G – – – – – Weight categories Size category Manufacturer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order number Colour code: 9H95 Automatic child seat recognition Category 0: up to 10 kg E – – – – – Category 0+: up to 13 kg E Britax Römer BABY SAFE 03 301146 B6 6 86 plus 04 301146 8224 No D – – – – – C – – – – – Category D I: C 9 to 18 kg B – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Britax Römer DUO plus 03 301133 A 000 970 04 301133 11 00 Yes A 000 970 16 00 No 04 301133 A 000 970 21 00 Yes – – B1 A – – – Z 61 Safety Children in the vehicle 62 Children in the vehicle Safety Problems with automatic child seat recognition Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is lit. A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front airbag has therefore been disabled as desired. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is lit. or The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/or the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you switch the ignition on. G WARNING There is no child restraint system fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning. There is a risk of injury. X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptop Rmobile phone Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still lit: Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of parking position P. Rshift the manual transmission into neutral. Rstart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave Rshift children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are travelling in the Driving safety systems vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Override feature for the rear side windows Rrear Safety You can activate the following child-proof locks: Rrear doors (Y page 63) side windows (Y page 63) Child-proof locks for the rear doors X You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. 63 To activate/deactivate: press button :. If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 64) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 64) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distance warning function and adaptive Brake Assist) (Y page 65) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 65) RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 68) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 68) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 72) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 72) Z 64 Driving safety systems Safety Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. i The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tyres" section (Y page 326). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General notes ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 64). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 265) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 235). ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/hupwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Brakes If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. X If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS (Brake Assist) General notes BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 64). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking X Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST General notes COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of the adaptive Brake Assist and the distance warning signal, which are described in the following. Distance warning function Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 64). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the distance warning function alone. Rnot Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate the distance warning function in the on-board computer (Y page 224). If the distance warning function is activated, the Ä symbol appears in the assistance graphics display. The distance warning function can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention, the distance warning function cannot prevent a collision. The distance warning function issues a warning at speeds: Rof around 30 km/h or more, if, over several seconds, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Rof around 7 km/h or higher, if you very quickly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Z 65 Safety Driving safety systems Driving safety systems 66 X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or Safety X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of about 70 km/h, the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. If you approach an obstacle and the distance warning function detects a risk of a collision, the system will alert you both visually and acoustically. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Please observe the information in the section on running-in the vehicle (Y page 146). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Rsnow Adaptive Brake Assist i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 64). G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist may: Rintervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rto stationary obstacles Rwhen cornering As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in braking during hazardous situations at speeds above 7 km/h and uses the radar sensor system to evaluate the traffic situation. With the help of a sensor system, adaptive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If you approach an obstacle and adaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, adaptive Brake Assist calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal is no longer any danger of a collision Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if adaptive Brake Assist requires particularly high brake pressure, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are deployed simultaneously. Up to vehicle speeds of around 250 km/h, adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been recognised as such at least once over the period of observation. Adaptive Brake Assist does not react to stationary obstacles. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rthere Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Rsnow Please observe the information in the section on running-in the vehicle (Y page 146). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS General notes COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is only available on vehicles with DISTRONIC. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS extends the functionality of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST with an automatic braking function. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimise the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. In critical situations COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS also initiates automatic braking. Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer (Y page 224). If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is activated, the Ä symbol appears in the assistance graphics display. If the driver's seat belt is fastened, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can brake automatically within a speed range of between 7 km/h and 200 km/h. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can also react to stationary obstacles with automatic braking within a speed range of between 7 km/h and 30 km/h. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if the automatic braking function of COLLISION PREVENTION Z 67 Safety Driving safety systems Safety 68 Driving safety systems ASSIST PLUS intervenes powerfully, preventive passenger protection measures (PRESAFE®) are deployed simultaneously. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning button (Y page 113). Rdirt General notes on the sensors or obscured sensors or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Please observe the information in the section on running-in the vehicle (Y page 146). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Rsnow Adaptive brake lamps The adaptive brake lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation: Rby means of flashing brake lamps hazard warning lamps are activated If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 64). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 64). ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. ETS remains active when you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! When testing the electric parking brake Characteristics of ESP® ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the igni- General notes If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. on a braking dynamometer, switch off the ignition. Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. tion when the electric parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer. Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per- formance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Before operating the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. ! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with the front or rear axle raised. Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your vehicle with the front axle raised, it is important that you observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 320). Vehicles with 4MATIC: when towing your vehicle with both axles on the ground, it is important that you observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 321). ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å ESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 267) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 235). i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except AMG vehicles) Important safety notes You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® RESP® is activated. is deactivated. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. Z 69 Safety Driving safety systems Driving safety systems 70 It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 64). i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations You can select between the following states of ESP®: Rin Safety Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG vehicles) described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer. X To deactivate:(Y page 224). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To activate:(Y page 224). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Rengine RESP® is activated. handling mode is activated. ® RESP is deactivated. RSPORT G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. Rin i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Driving safety systems Rengine torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® ON message appears in the multifunction display. X Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. Rtraction control is still activated. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Rengine ESP® trailer stabilisation General notes If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilised. Important safety notes G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent Z Safety Deactivating/activating ESP® 71 Safety 72 Anti-theft systems the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/ trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of about 65 km/h. ESP® trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General notes EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 186) and hill start assist (Y page 149). For further information, see Driving tips (Y page 171). STEER CONTROL General notes STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering support is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. Rthe vehicle starts to skid. Important safety notes Important safety notes No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- RESP® tion for driving safety systems (Y page 64). G WARNING If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 265) as well as display messages (Y page 237). is malfunctioning. steering is faulty. Power steering will, however, continue to function. Rthe Anti-theft systems Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. X To activate: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. The engine can be started by anyone with a valid key that is left inside the vehicle. Anti-theft systems when you start the engine. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Tow-away protection Function An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This can occur if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. Priming Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed Rthe boot lid is closed Only then is the tow-away protection primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 60 seconds. X X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. Deactivating X X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Rthe vehicle with the emergency key element Ra door Rthe boot lid Rthe bonnet X To stop the alarm: insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the % or & button on the key. The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Unlock the vehicle with the key. or Insert the key into the ignition lock. Tow-away protection is switched off automatically. Deactivating Remove the key from the ignition lock. Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key. Tow-away protection is deactivated. X X Z Safety i The immobiliser is always deactivated 73 Anti-theft systems 74 Tow-away protection remains deactivated until: Safety Rthe vehicle is unlocked again Ra door is opened and closed again Rthe vehicle is locked again To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the towaway protection if you lock your vehicle and it: Ris being transported being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage Deactivating X Unlock the vehicle with the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The interior motion sensor is automatically deactivated. Deactivating Ris Interior motion sensor Function When the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. This can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. Priming Make sure that: side windows are closed Rthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging on the rear-view mirror or on the grab handles on the roof trim This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed Rthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed Rthe boot lid is closed Only then is the interior motion sensor primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X Rthe Remove the key from the ignition lock. Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes several times in rapid succession. X Lock the vehicle with the key. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. X X The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again door is opened and closed again Rthe vehicle is locked again To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and: Ra Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle Rthe panorama sliding sunroof remains open Rthe side windows remain open i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a double lock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key (Y page 84). Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the Anti-theft systems 75 Safety inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 83). Z 76 77 Useful information .............................. 78 Key ....................................................... 78 Doors .................................................... 83 Boot ...................................................... 86 Side windows ...................................... 88 Opening and closing Panorama sliding sunroof .................. 91 78 Key Useful information Opening and closing i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 24). G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Key Do not keep the key: Important safety notes Rwith G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rget Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 74). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 63). The anti-theft alarm system Key Key functions Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until battery check lamp (Y page 80) flashes twice. i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: X : & To lock the vehicle ; F To open the boot lid = % To unlock the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press button =. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again anti-theft system is primed again X To lock centrally: press button :. Rthe The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors boot lid Rthe fuel filler flap When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. Rthe i When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 228). i You can also set an audible signal to con- firm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 229). X Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The key now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 80). X Emergency key element General notes If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 73). To open the boot lid automatically: press and hold button ; until the boot lid opens (Y page 87). Z Opening and closing is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm . 79 Key 80 There are several ways to deactivate the alarm: X Press the % or & button on the key. or Opening and closing X Insert the key into the ignition lock. If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key into the ignition lock. Removing the emergency key element X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. For further information about: Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 85) Runlocking the boot (Y page 88) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 86) Inserting the emergency key element X Push emergency key element ; completely into the key until it engages, and release catch : is back in its basic position. Battery of the key Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Checking the battery Key 81 Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Replace the battery (Y page 81). i If the key battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle i You can obtain a battery from any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 79). Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contamination. X First insert the front tabs of battery tray cover : into the housing; then press to close it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 79). X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover : opens. While doing so, do not hold cover : shut. X Remove battery tray cover :. X Z Opening and closing X 82 Key Problems with the key Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % / & button. Opening and closing Problem If this does not work: X Check the key battery and replace it if necessary (Y page 81). X Lock (Y page 85) or unlock (Y page 86) the vehicle using the emergency key element. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % / & button. X The key is faulty. X Lock (Y page 85) or unlock (Y page 86) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You have lost a key. Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X You have lost the emergency key element. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be started using the key. X If this does not work: Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 312). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 316). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The steering lock is mechanically blocked. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions. Doors G WARNING Important safety notes If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. Stow luggage or loads preferably in the boot. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 276). United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the Z Opening and closing The on-board voltage is too low. Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. X The engine cannot be started using the key. 83 Doors Opening and closing 84 interior motion sensor (Y page 74). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 63). The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm . Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside i When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window is raised again. ! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will then not be possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door to close. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window. X You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the childproof locks (Y page 63). Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 74). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 63). The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for example. Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and opens. For all countries except the United Kingdom: You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). X X To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If all the doors and the boot lid are closed, the vehicle locks. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key. For all countries except the United Kingdom: Doors Rlocked with the locking button for the central locking or Rlocked automatically Tthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. Only the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked. Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 74). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 63). The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). When a locked door is opened from inside the vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be observed if the vehicle has been: Rlocked with the locking button for the central locking or Rlocked automatically Tthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. Only the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked. Automatic locking feature To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To prime: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer. You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 229). Unlocking the driver's door (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 73). Z Opening and closing You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the childproof locks (Y page 63). When a locked door is opened from inside the vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be observed if the vehicle has been: 85 Boot 86 Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 79). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Opening and closing X Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The door is unlocked. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid are locked. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 79). X X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 79). i If you lock the vehicle as described above, X Locking the vehicle (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the key, use the emergency key element. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the boot lid. X Press the locking button (Y page 84). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 79). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. the fuel filler flap is not locked. The antitheft alarm system is not primed. Boot Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid. Never drive with the boot lid open. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never Boot leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. 87 Closing ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 362). Stow luggage or loads preferably in the boot. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 276). Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The boot lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside automatically from outside Ropened automatically from inside Runlocked from the inside with the emergency key element Ropened Opening and closing manually from outside Opening X Press the % button on the key. Pull down the boot lid using handle :. Let the boot lid drop into the lock. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key. X X Opening automatically from outside General notes ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. i Opening dimensions of the boot lid (Y page 362). Opening You can open the boot lid automatically using the key or the handle in the boot lid. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid opens. or X If the boot is unlocked, pull the boot lid handle and release it again immediately. X X Pull handle :. Raise the boot lid. Opening automatically from inside General notes ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. Z Opening and closing i The opening dimensions of the boot lid 88 Side windows i The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 362). Opening and closing Opening Insert suitable tool ;, e.g. a screwdriver, horizontally on the left-hand side into emergency release slot :. X Push tool ; evenly in the direction of the arrow and open the boot lid. X You can open the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. X To open: pull remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid opens. i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 86), the boot is also locked. Side windows Important safety notes Emergency release If the boot lid can no longer be opened from outside the vehicle, use the emergency release on the inside of the boot lid. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. i The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 362). You can reach the emergency release via the boot. Fold the rear backrests forward (Y page 280). G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Side windows 89 The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from travelling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. Front left Front right Rear right Rear left The reversing function does not react: : ; = ? Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- i The side windows cannot be operated Opening and closing the side windows Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding button. X To open fully: press the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding button and hold it. X To close fully: pull the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again. i If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling again. G WARNING gers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing, make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 63). X i You can continue to operate the side windows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Z Opening and closing Side window reversing feature Side windows 90 Convenience opening feature You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle the side windows Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds Opening and closing Ropen i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the key. The key must be close to the driver's door handle. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the panorama sunroof are in the desired position. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. X Press and hold the % button again until the panorama sliding sunroof is in the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. X Convenience closing feature G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose the side windows the panorama sliding sunroof On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof, you can then close the roller sunblinds. Rclose i The key must be close to the driver's door handle. Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. X On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: Press and hold the & button again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding sunroof close. X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. X Resetting the side windows You must reset each side window if: Rthe side window opens again slightly after being closed fully. Rthe side window can no longer be fully opened or closed. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 89). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 89). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X Panorama sliding sunroof 91 Problems with the side windows If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. Remove the objects. X Close the side window. X A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Panorama sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped: Important safety notes Rrelease In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. the switch immediately, or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Z Opening and closing G WARNING Opening and closing 92 Panorama sliding sunroof G WARNING At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. This means that the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Sliding sunroof reversing feature The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the sliding roof. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling again. X i After opening the sliding sunroof, the roller sunblind automatically closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the vehicle interior. i If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it automatically lowers slightly at higher Panorama sliding sunroof i You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. i The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof carrier is fitted. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding sunroof. If contact is made with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers slightly but remains raised at the rear . Rain-closing feature when the engine is switched off The rain-closing feature is only available for vehicles with a rain sensor. When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain. Rat extreme outside temperatures. Rafter six hours. Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply. The sliding sunroof remains raised at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated. Rain-closing feature when driving The raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers at the rear when driving if it starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on: Rthe road speed and intensity of the rain You can manually cancel the automatic closing procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch in any direction. To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the 3 switch in direction :. The rain-closing feature remains activated. Rthe Operating the roller sunblinds for the sliding sunroof Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the roller sunblind parts of the body could be trapped between the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The opening/closing process is stopped. Rduring The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed together when the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof does not close if: Roller sunblinds reversing feature Rit The roller sunblinds are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the roller blind during the closing process, the roller blind opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid, not a substi- is raised at the rear. Rit is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor, e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge. Z Opening and closing speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low speeds it raises again automatically. 93 Panorama sliding sunroof 94 tute for your attention when closing the roller sunblind. G WARNING tion. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling again. i After opening the sliding sunroof, the roller sunblind automatically closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the vehicle interior. The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- Opening and closing gers Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again man- ually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring Opening and closing Overhead control panel : To open ; To open = To close Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direcX Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds If the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly, reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds: Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the roller sunblinds are fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof (Y page 92) and the roller sunblinds (Y page 94) can be fully opened and closed again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X Panorama sliding sunroof 95 Problems with the sliding sunroof If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then the reversing function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens not be closed and you again slightly: cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Z Opening and closing G WARNING 96 97 Useful information .............................. 98 Correct driver's seat position ............ 98 Seats .................................................... 99 Steering wheel .................................. 104 Mirrors ............................................... 105 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory functions ............................. 107 98 Correct driver's seat position Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Seats, steering wheel and mirrors els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 24). Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. X Make sure that seat = is correctly adjusted. Manual seat adjustment (Y page 100) Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 100) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted correctly (Y page 101). When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint. Observe the safety notes on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 104). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted correctly. Adjusting the steering wheel (Y page 104) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. Ryou Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 46). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 48). Observe the safety notes on seat adjustment (Y page 99). Seats Rfit snugly across your body. Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder. Rbe routed across your hips in the pelvic area. X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 105) so that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat and exterior mirror settings (Y page 107). While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. G WARNING Seats Important safety notes G WARNING If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seat belt should: 99 Seats 100 ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or rearwards. X Release lever : again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. X Backrest angle Relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Turn handwheel ? forwards or backwards. X Seat height X Pull handle = upwards or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Seat cushion angle Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly supported. X Turn handwheel ; forwards or backwards. Adjusting the seats electrically i Further related subjects: RLuggage compartment enlargement (folding down the rear seats) (Y page 279) Adjusting the seats manually : Head restraint height8 ; Seat cushion angle = Seat height ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment A Backrest angle i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 107). 8 Not available on vehicles with sports seats. Seats G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-aft position G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. General notes For vehicles with sports seats you cannot adjust the front head restraints or the outer rear head restraints. Adjusting the head restraints manually Adjusting the head restraint height This function allows you to adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the head. To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. There are a number of detents. X To move backwards: press and hold release button : and push the head restraint backwards. X When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in position. X Adjusting the head restraints electrically X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment (Y page 100) up or down in the direction of the arrow. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the head restraints 101 Seats 102 Rear seat head restraints Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height Fold the seat backrest slightly forwards in order to remove the head restraint (Y page 280). X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired height. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. Removing and fitting the rear seat head restraints G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. The rear head restraints on the outer seats can be removed and refitted. For vehicles with sports seats the rear head restraints cannot be removed and refitted. Electric head restraints cannot be removed. For more information about removing electric head restraints, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. : ; = ? To raise the backrest contour To soften the backrest contour To lower the backrest contour To harden the backrest contour Seats To adjust the contour of the seat and for improved lateral support, you can individually adjust the front seats.9 Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cushion To set the side bolsters of the seat cushion narrower: press button :. X To set the side bolsters of the seat cushion wider: press button ;. X Adjusting the seat backrest side bolsters To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest narrower: press button =. X To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest wider: press button ?. X Switching the seat heating on/off Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating repeatedly. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. X i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Activating/deactivating G WARNING If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occupants with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. 9 Only in conjunction with electrically adjustable seats. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors AMG Performance Seat 103 104 Steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Problems with the seat heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically. Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Adjusting the steering wheel G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpectedly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion. : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. X Mirrors Rear-view mirror X Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. X The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated at low outside temperatures. Heating takes a maximum of ten minutes. i The exterior mirrors can also be heated manually by switching on the rear window heating. Folding the exterior mirrors in/out electrically Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Mirrors 105 Mirrors 106 i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 230). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Briefly press button :. Folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically button (Y page 105) until you hear a click and then the mirror engage in position. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 105). Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors The "Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors" function is only available if the vehicle is equipped with the "Mirror package". The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if: Rthe ignition is switched on and light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Rincident If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 230): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door. General notes i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in Setting and storing the parking position manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position (forwards or backwards), proceed as follows: Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding X Parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side The "Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side" function is only available if the vehicle is equipped with the "Memory package". Using reverse gear You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. Memory functions 107 Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. Calling up a stored parking position setting Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. You should see the rear wheel and the kerb in the exterior mirror. The parking position is stored. X X i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. Using the memory button You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. You should see the rear wheel and the kerb in the exterior mirror. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side with the corresponding button (Y page 105). X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. X The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory functions Storing settings G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, the adjustments could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side while the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING If the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Memory functions 108 While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. If someone becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment is stopped. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING If children activate the memory function, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint. Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides. Adjust the seat (Y page 100). Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side (Y page 105). X Briefly press the M memory button and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. 109 Useful information ............................ 110 Exterior lighting ................................ 110 Interior lighting ................................. 116 Replacing bulbs ................................. 117 Lights and windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers ........................... 121 110 Exterior lighting Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Lights and windscreen wipers ist workshops: (Y page 24). Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Driving abroad General notes If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border (only vehicles with Intelligent Light System). This prevents oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway. Vehicles with bi-xenon and halogen headlamps It is not necessary to switch your headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam when driving in countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered. Legal require- ments are fulfilled without switching the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam. Vehicles with Intelligent Light System X Before crossing the border, set the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam and after returning back to asymmetrical dipped beam via the "Dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left" function in the on-board computer (Y page 227). If the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and "extended range foglamps" functions are not available. Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using the: Rlight switch Rheadlamp range control (vehicles with halogen headlamps only) (Y page 112) Rcombination switch (Y page 113) Ron-board computer (Y page 226) Light switch Operation 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting Exterior lighting led by the light sensor 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps B R Rear foglamp C N Foglamp (vehicles with front fog- lamps only) If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the key in position 0 Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times. à is the preferred light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have switched on the daytime driving lights function in the on-board computer, the daytime driving lights or the side lamps and dippedbeam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. The daytime driving lights improve the detectability of your vehicle during the day. Here, the daytime driving lights function must be switched on via the on-board computer (Y page 226). When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and the daytime driving lights switch off. Dipped-beam headlamps When the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in position L, the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on even if the light sensor does not sense dark ambient light conditions. This is advantageous when there is fog or rain. X To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Foglamps In conditions where visibility is poor due to fog, snow or rain, the foglamps improve visibility as well as making it easier for other road users to see you. They can be operated together with the side lamps or together with the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps. X To switch on the foglamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. Z Lights and windscreen wipers 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- 111 Exterior lighting 112 Press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the front foglamps: press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Lights and windscreen wipers Only vehicles with front foglamps are equipped with the "Foglamp" function; for how to operate the foglamps on vehicles with the Intelligent Light System (Y page 115). Rear foglamp The rear foglamp improves the visibility of your vehicle in heavy fog for the following traffic. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear foglamps. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i When the rear foglamp is switched on, the centre brake lamp in the tail lamp switches off due to a legal requirement. Side lamps ! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the side lamps or parking lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T side lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left parking lamp. X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Parking lamps Switching on the parking lamps ensures that the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the parking lamps: the key is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen headlamps) The headlamp range control allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps to suit the vehicle load. Headlamp range control g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat occupied 1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear seats occupied 2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear seats occupied, luggage compartment laden 3 Driver's and front-passenger seats occupied and maximum permissible rear axle load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer X X Start the engine. Turn the headlamp range control to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. Exterior lighting Combination switch 113 i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation of the main-beam headlamps (Y page 115). Turn signals Headlamp flasher To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. : ; = ? Main-beam headlamps Turn signal, right Headlamp flasher Turn signal, left To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. Hazard warning lamps X Main-beam headlamps To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X The hazard warning lamps switch on automatically if: Ran airbag is deployed or vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. Rthe The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 10 km/h again after a full brake application. i The hazard warning lamps continue to operate even if the ignition is switched off. Z Lights and windscreen wipers X 114 Exterior lighting Headlamp cleaning system Cornering light function If the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated five times (Y page 121) while the lights are on and the engine is running, the headlamps are cleaned automatically. When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Lights and windscreen wipers Intelligent Light System General notes The Intelligent Light System is a system that adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. It offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering light function, motorway mode and extended range foglamps. The system is only active when it is dark. You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent Light System" using the on-board computer (Y page 227). Active light function The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The cornering light function can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steering wheel Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 70 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Motorway mode The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on. Exterior lighting Motorway mode increases the range of the beam. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for at least 1000 m Rif you are driving at speeds above 130 km/h Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation. The system automatically adapts the dippedbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it switches on the main-beam headlamps again. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Lights and windscreen wipers Extended range foglamps The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp. Not active: if, following activation, you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp. Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognise road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist recognises road users too late or not at all. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the main-beam headlamps in good time. Rwho Adaptive Highbeam Assist General notes You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between dipped beam and main beam automatically. The system recognises vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or travelling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from main beam to dipped beam. 115 Z Interior lighting 116 Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or Lights and windscreen wipers snow Rdirt on the sensors or if the sensors are obscured Headlamps misted up on the inside Under certain climatic and physical conditions, moisture may form in the headlamp. This moisture will not impair the function of the headlamp. Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the dipped-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h: The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 30 km/h and no other road users are recognised: The main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below 25 km/h or other road users are recognised or the roads are adequately lit: The main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Front overhead control panel : p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off ; c Switches the front interior lighting on = v Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ? | Switches the front interior lighting/ automatic interior lighting control off A p Switches the right-hand front read- ing lamp on/off B Switches the automatic interior lighting control on Replacing bulbs 117 Manual interior lighting control To switch the front interior lighting on: set the switch to the c position. X To switch off the interior lighting: set the switch to the | position or (if the door is closed) to the centre position. X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. X : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp lamp on/off Interior lighting control Important notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The brightness of the ambient lighting may be set using the on-board computer (Y page 227). Automatic interior lighting control X To switch on: set the switch to centre position B. X To switch off: set the switch to the | position. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior lighting is activated for a short time when the key is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 228). Ropen Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the key. Replacing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs G DANGER Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You can get an electric shock if you remove the cover of the xenon bulb and touch the electrical contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. Never touch the parts or the electrical contacts of the xenon bulb. Always have work on the xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs, you can recognise this by the following: the cone of light from the xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before the engine is started. Z Lights and windscreen wipers on/off ; p Switches the right-hand reading 118 Replacing bulbs Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Lights and windscreen wipers Other bulbs G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during use. When replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before replacing the bulb. that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs You can replace the following bulbs. The details for the bulb type can be found in the legend. Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou touch it is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only fit spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. There are bulbs other than the xenon bulbs that you cannot replace yourself. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 118). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure Rit Vehicles with halogen headlamps : Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W ; Main-beam headlamp/daytime driving lamp/side lamp/parking lamp: H15 55 W/15 W = Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W Vehicles with Intelligent Light System : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W Replacing bulbs 119 Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) : Rear foglamp: P 21 W ; Brake lamp: W 16 W = Brake lamp: W 16 W ? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W A Reversing lamp: W 16 W Replacing the front bulbs Fitting/removing the cover on the front wheel arch You must remove the cover from the front wheel housing before you can change the front bulbs. Remove the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 119). X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Replace the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 119). X Main-beam headlamps/daytime driving lights/side lamps and parking lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) To remove: switch off the lights. Turn the front wheels inwards. X Turn rotary knob : through 90°. Cover ; is released. X Push cover ; down. X To fit: push cover ; up. X Turn rotary knob : through 90°. Cover ; is locked. X X X X Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) Replacing bulbs 120 Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the stop. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Lights and windscreen wipers Turn signal lamp (halogen headlamps) Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Replacing the rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels You must open the side trim panel in the boot before you can replace the bulbs in the tail lamps. Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X Cornering lamps (Intelligent Light System) Example: right-hand side trim panel To open: release right or left side trim panel : at the top and fold it down in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert side panel :. X Tail lamps Switch off the lights. Open the boot. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 120). X X X X Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. Windscreen wipers 121 Windscreen wipers Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off Press retaining clips : at the same time in the direction of the arrows. X Carefully remove the bulb holder with the contacted connectors and the bulbs. when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. X Bulb holder : Brake lamp ; Brake lamp = Rear foglamp ? Reversing lamp A Turn signals Brake lamp/rear foglamp/reversing lamp: remove the corresponding bulb from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Turn signal lamp: lightly press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Reinsert the bulb holder and engage on retaining clips :. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 120). X ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î to wipe the wind- screen using washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X Z Lights and windscreen wipers ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers 122 Windscreen wipers windscreen may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- Lights and windscreen wipers screen becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windscreen wipers to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Removing the wiper blades X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. Press both release clips ;. Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = away from wiper arm ?. X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of arrow A. X X Fitting the wiper blades ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. ! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen. Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the Position new wiper blade : with recess B on lug A. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining clips ; engage in bracket ?. X Windscreen wipers 123 Make sure that wiper blade : is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. Lights and windscreen wipers X Z 124 Windscreen wipers Problems with the windscreen wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lights and windscreen wipers The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The windscreen washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist worknozzles no longer hits shop. the centre of the windscreen. 125 Useful information ............................ 126 Overview of climate control systems ................................................... 126 Operating the climate control system ..................................................... 130 Climate control Adjusting the air vents ..................... 143 126 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Climate control ist workshops: (Y page 24). Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. To prevent the windows from misting up: Rswitch Rswitch briefly Rswitch off climate control only briefly on air-recirculation mode only on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the "demist windscreen" function briefly, if required THERMATIC automatic climate control/ THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable substances from the air. THERMATIC automatic climate control/ THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and panorama sliding sunroof closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 137). Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the side panelling clear (Y page 120). Otherwise, the vehicle will not be ventilated correctly. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 90). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most par- ticles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. With THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control, gaseous pollutants and odours will also be reduced. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As this depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. i It is possible that the residual heat func- tion may be activated automatically an hour after the key has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes. Overview of climate control systems 127 : ; = ? A B C To set the temperature (Y page 132) To demist the windscreen (Y page 134) To set the air distribution (Y page 133) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 136) To set the airflow (Y page 133) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 130) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 135) Notes on using THERMATIC automatic climate control automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of THERMATIC automatic climate control. RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by turning control knob A clockwise to the desired position (except position 0). RSet the temperature to 22 †. RRecommendation for avoiding misted windows at low exterior temperatures or in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with dehumidification function (Y page 130). Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible switch off P and O (Y page 133). Deactivate air-recirculation mode e (Y page 136). Set airflow control A to a setting between 3 and 6 (Y page 133). RRecommendation for rapid cooling or heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set airflow control A to a setting between 3 and 6 (Y page 133). RRecommendation for a constant vehicle interior temperature: set airflow control A to a setting between 1 and 3 (Y page 133). RRecommendation for air distribution in winter: select the O and ¯ settings (Y page 133). Recommendation for air distribution in summer: select the P or P and ¯ settings (Y page 133). ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. Climate control Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control 128 Overview of climate control systems ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. Climate control if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RVehicles with COMAND Online: if you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. See also the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 151). Overview of climate control systems 129 : ; = ? A B C D E F G H I J To set the temperature, left (Y page 132) To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 132) To demist the windscreen (Y page 134) To increase the airflow (Y page 133) To set the air distribution (Y page 133) Display To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 136) To switch climate control on/off (Y page 130) To set the temperature, right (Y page 132) To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 137) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 130) To reduce the airflow (Y page 133) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 135) To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 133) Notes on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Automatic climate control The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting" func- tion briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Climate control Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (2-zone) Operating the climate control system 130 RUse the residual heat function if you want to Climate control heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. RVehicles with COMAND Online: if you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. See also the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 151). THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: switch on climate control primarily using the à button. Activating/deactivating the cooling with air dehumidification function Operating the climate control system General notes Switching climate control on/off If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could mist up. Therefore, only switch off climate control briefly. THERMATIC automatic climate control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to the desired position (except position 0) (Y page 127). X To switch off: turn control A anti-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 127). X Operating the climate control system 131 Activating/deactivating To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature. Climate control X Operating the climate control system 132 Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in the ¿ button flashes three times or goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification system cannot be switched on. Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Climate control Setting climate control to automatic mode General notes Only THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control features the "Control climate control automatically" function. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly. X To switch to manual mode: press the É or Ë button. or X Press the K or I button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are deactivated. Setting the temperature THERMATIC automatic climate control You can set the temperature for the entire vehicle. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X To increase/reduce: turn control : clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 127). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Setting climate control to automatic mode Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X To increase/reduce: turn control : or E clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 129). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X X Operating the climate control system i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise until they engage. THERMATIC automatic climate control Air distribution settings ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents i You can also activate several of the air distribution settings simultaneously. In order to do this, press several of the air distribution buttons. The air is then routed through different air vents. Setting the air distribution X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯ buttons. The corresponding indicator lamp comes on. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Air distribution settings ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents10 b Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the demister vents10 a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents 10 Only for certain countries. Setting the air distribution Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. X Setting the airflow THERMATIC automatic climate control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X To increase/reduce: turn control A clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 127). X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X To increase/reduce: press the K or I button. X Switching the ZONE function on/off This function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. X To activate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. The temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. X To deactivate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Climate control Setting the air distribution 133 Operating the climate control system 134 The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. Demisting the windscreen You can use this function to defrost the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. X or X i You should only select the "Windscreen demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. THERMATIC automatic climate control: turn temperature control : clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 127). THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: turn temperature control : or E clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 129). Climate control X Rhigh airflow temperature Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off i The "Windscreen demisting" function automatically sets the blower output to the optimum demisting effect. As a result, the airflow may increase or decrease automatically after the button is pressed. Rhigh i You can adjust the blower output man- ually while the "Windscreen demisting" function is in operation: RTHERMATIC automatic climate control: turn airflow control A clockwise or anticlockwise (Y page 127). RTHERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: press the ó or ô button. X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside THERMATIC automatic climate control X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the ¬ "Windscreen demisting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the ¬ "Windscreen demisting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Windows misted up on the outside Activate the windscreen wipers. Set the air distribution to P or O. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X X Operating the climate control system 135 Rear window heating General notes The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. It otherwise switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. Climate control X Operating the climate control system 136 Problems with the rear window heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be activated. The battery has not been sufficiently charged. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating can be activated again. Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode Climate control General notes You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can mist up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows misting up. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X To activate: press the e button. The indicator lamp in the e button lights up. X i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto- matically at high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the e button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the e button. The indicator lamp in the e button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below about 5 † Rafter approximately five minutes if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5 † if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated Convenience opening/closing using the air-recirculation button G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. G WARNING During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. There is a risk of injury. When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. If someone becomes trapped, press the W switch immediately to open/close the side window Operating the climate control system they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. in the door. The side window stops. To continue closing the side window, pull on the W switch. Convenience closing feature: press and hold the e button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. The indicator lamp in the e button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. If parts of the body are in the closing area during convenience closing, proceed as follows: To open/close the side window, press the W button. The side window stops. X To then open the side window, press the W button again. or X Press and hold the e button again for at least two seconds. The side windows move in the opposite direction. X Press the 3 button for opening/closing the panorama sliding sunroof. The panorama sliding sunroof stops. X To then open the panorama sliding sunroof, pull back on the 3 switch. i Notes on the automatic reversing function for: X Rthe side window (Y page 89) Rthe panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 92) X Convenience opening feature: press and hold the e button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof have opened. The side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof move back to their original position. The indicator lamp in the e button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. i If you open the side windows or the panorama sliding sunroof manually after closing with the convenience closing feature, Activating/deactivating the residual heat function General notes The residual heat function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. i You cannot use the ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 147). X To activate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. X To deactivate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. X i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen the auxiliary heating is switched on Rwhen Z Climate control X 137 138 Operating the climate control system Auxiliary heating/ventilation Climate control Important safety notes G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle, especially carbon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. You should switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces which do not have an extraction system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle away from the wind. G WARNING When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle, e.g. the exhaust system, can become very hot. Flammable materials, e.g. leaves, grass or branches, may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. Make sure no flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle parts when the auxiliary heating is switched on. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to the set temperature. This occurs without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the fuel tank must be at least ¼ full to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. The auxiliary heating switches off when the engine is switched off. The auxiliary ventilation switches off when you turn the key to key position 2 (Y page 147). The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 30 minutes. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Before switching on Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Set the desired temperature. X Auxiliary heating or ventilation can also be switched on if the manually set climate control is activated. Optimum comfort can be attained when the system is set to automatic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated or deactivated using the remote control or the button on the centre console. The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 229). Operating the climate control system Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the centre console button General notes 139 The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: Rsources of radio interference objects between the remote control and the vehicle Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space Rsolid i The optimum range can be achieved if you i A battery symbol appears in the display when the battery in the remote control is low. Replace the remote control battery (Y page 140). The colours of the indicator lamps on the button have the following meanings: Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on Red Auxiliary heating switched on Yellow Departure time preselected (Y page 229) Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off Switching on the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : lights up. Switching off the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : goes out. Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the remote control Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Remote control : Display ; . To check the status/set the depar- ture time = ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/ ventilation ? u To switch on the auxiliary heating/ ventilation A , To check the status/set the depar- ture time To activate: press the u button. ON is shown in the remote control display. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Z Climate control hold the remote control vertically, pointing upwards when you press one of the buttons. 140 Operating the climate control system Checking the status of the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the , or . button. The following messages may appear in the display: Display Meaning Climate control The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is switched off. The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently activated. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently activated. The departure time appears in the display. Setting the departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The Î symbol in the remote control display flashes. X Press the , or . button to set the desired departure time. i The longer you press the , or . button, the faster the time changes. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The new departure time is stored. Activating the set departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display. X Press the u button. The Í symbol and the departure time appear in the display. Deactivating a set departure time Press the , or . button. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown in the display. X Press the . button. The first departure time stored appears in the display. X Press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Replacing the remote control battery G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Operating the climate control system 141 H Environmental note Climate control Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is required. Prise apart the side arms of battery cover ; and pull off battery cover ;. X Remove old battery :. X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity signs on the back of the remote control when doing so. X Slide battery cover ; back onto the remote control. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. X Z 142 Operating the climate control system Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control. © There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. FAIL Climate control FAIL The auxiliary heating is faulty. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. FAIL The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The auxiliary heating was started more than twice when the engine was switched off. X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The starter battery is not sufficiently charged. X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. Adjusting the air vents Display messages 143 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. Adjusting the air vents Climate control The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The auxiliary heating is faulty. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Setting the centre air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior. To open the centre air vent: turn the adjuster in one of centre air vents : anticlockwise. X To close the centre air vent: turn the adjuster in one of centre air vents : clockwise as far as it will go. X i Move the adjusters for the air vents ver- tically or horizontally, to set the direction of the airflow. i Optimal climate control function is ach- ieved by opening the air vents fully and setting the adjusters to the middle position. Z Adjusting the air vents 144 Adjusting the side air vents Climate control : Side window demister vent ; Side air vent To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; anti-clockwise. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will go. X Setting the rear-compartment air vents : Rear-compartment air vent, left ; Rear-compartment air vent, right = Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or down. i If the control panel in the front is switched off, no air can flow through the rear air vents. X 145 Useful information ............................ 146 Running-in notes ............................... 146 Manual transmission ........................ 154 Automatic transmission ................... 155 Refuelling ........................................... 163 Parking ............................................... 167 Driving tips ........................................ 170 Driving systems ................................ 173 Towing a trailer ................................. 207 Driving and parking Driving ............................................... 146 146 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 24). Running-in notes Important safety notes In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1500 km If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life. RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine speeds for the first 1500 km. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, before the rev counter needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the rev counter. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. RVehicles with automatic transmission: try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). After 1500 km, you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles: RDo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for the first 1,500 km. allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. ROnly i You should also observe these notes on running-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Driving Key positions G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the respective drive positions when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. ! AMG vehicles: avoid full-load operation and engine speeds greater than 5000 rpm when the engine is cold. This helps to protect the engine and avoids uncomfortable driving. g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine Vehicles with manual transmission: the steering is locked when the key is taken out of the ignition lock. i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on. The engine cannot be started. Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Z Driving and parking G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. 147 Driving 148 Driving and parking Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. i Vehicles with a petrol engine: the engine runs at a higher engine speed during the cold start procedure so that the catalytic converter can reach operating temperature more quickly. The sound of the engine may change as a result. i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. Pulling away Manual transmission ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin- ning the wheels. Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Shift to neutral N. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. X Release the electric parking brake (Y page 168). X Release the brake pedal. X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal. i You can only start the engine when the i Follow the shift recommendations in the Automatic transmission i The vehicle locks centrally once you have Manual transmission X clutch pedal is fully depressed. X Shift the transmission to position P. Transmission position display P is shown in the multifunction display. i When the transmission is in position N, you can also start the engine with the brake pedal depressed. Starting procedure To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 147) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 (Y page 147) in the ignition lock. The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the % preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 147) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X X multifunction display for an economical driving style (Y page 155). pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 229). Automatic transmission i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò20 †, you can only shift out of position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake is automatically released (Y page 168). The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster remains lit. X Depress the accelerator pedal. X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is held by the driving force of the engine, release lever :. the electric parking brake is released. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have i For further information on the electric X pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 229). i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Pulling away with a trailer parking brake, see (Y page 168). Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about a second. X Pull away. X To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake. X Press and hold handle :. The electric parking brake continues to brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. Further information on holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 158). Z 149 Driving and parking Driving 150 Driving ECO start/stop function Driving and parking Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes Automatic engine switch-off General notes The ECO start/stop function is operational and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe bonnet is closed Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in yellow. i All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is switched off automatically. i The engine can be switched off automat: ECO start/stop display If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. The stop/start function is automatically activated each time you start the engine with the ignition key. If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated (Y page 151) or a malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not displayed. AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C. ically a maximum of four times (initial stop, then three subsequent stops) in succession. The ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, automatic engine switch-off is again possible. Vehicles with manual transmission The ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically at low speeds. Driving 151 Vehicles with manual transmission ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. Rdepress Brake the vehicle. Engage neutral N (Y page 155) (follow gearshift instruction : to engage neutral N, if necessary). X Release the clutch pedal. The engine is switched off automatically. X X Vehicles with automatic transmission If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. i The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Rdepress the clutch pedal fully the accelerator pedal Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine is started automatically if you: Rrelease the brake pedal in transmission position D or N when the HOLD function is not active Rdepress the accelerator pedal Rmove the transmission out of position P i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. i If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the ¤ symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display. Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function Automatic engine start General notes The engine is started automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's charge status is too low X To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 150) are met, the ¤ symbol is lit green in the multifunction display. Z Driving and parking The engine is started automatically if you: Driving and parking 152 Driving If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 150) are met, the ¤ symbol is lit yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Driving 153 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 186) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 178). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before attempting to start the engine again. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 147). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. RThere If the engine does not start after several attempts: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The engine does not The fuel tank is empty. start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle. can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display shows 0. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 316). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. X If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z Driving and parking Problems with the engine Driving and parking 154 Manual transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: the engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperaThe coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to coolant warning lamp cool down. may also be on and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 294). Observe the warning warning tone may notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Manual transmission Gear lever ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 in good time. This uses the engine's braking effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. ! When shifting to 5th and 6th gear, you must press the shift lever to the right. Otherwise, you could shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the engine or transmission. If you shift down at too high a speed (transmission braking), this can cause the engine to overrev, leading to engine damage. Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the clutch. ! On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a Gear lever k Reverse gear 1 to 6 Forward gears Automatic transmission Shifting to neutral N 155 Automatic transmission G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. X X Depress the clutch pedal fully. Move the gear lever to position N :. Engaging reverse gear ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could damage the transmission. X Pull the gear lever up, push it to the left and then pull it back. i The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. For further information on the ECO start/ stop function; see (Y page 150). Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. i Bear in mind that power transmission between the engine and the transmission is interrupted when the engine is switched off. To prevent the vehicle from rolling away: Rwhen the engine is switched off and the vehicle is stationary, shift the automatic transmission to park position P and Rapply the electric parking brake DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): the DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. For information on the selector lever in AMG vehicles (Y page 157). X Shift gear according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Z Driving and parking Important safety notes 156 Automatic transmission Engaging park position P Driving and parking X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. Transmission position display P is shown in the multifunction display. i When you engage park position P, make sure that the transmission position display shows P in the multifunction display. j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display (Y page 156) in the multifunction display. Transmission position and drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. : Transmission position display ; Drive program display i The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever. ! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S. i You can only engage park position P when the vehicle is stationary. i The automatic transmission shifts into park position P automatically: Rif you open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary in transmission position D or R Rif you open the door while travelling at very low speeds in transmission position D or R In addition, a warning tone sounds and a display message is shown. i Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengages the parking lock. The transmission is in N neutral. At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò20 †, you can only shift out of park position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. In order to shift from park position P directly into R or D: Rdepress the brake pedal and the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down past the first point of resistance Rpush ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. Automatic transmission Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R 157 Transmission position and drive program display i The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. For further information on the ECO start/ stop function; see (Y page 150). Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is stationary. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. Example : Transmission position display ; Drive program display Shifting to neutral N The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. X X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. Engaging park position P Engaging drive position D Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is stationary. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X Selector lever X When the vehicle is stationary, press P button :. Transmission positions Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive B Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Do not shift the transmission into position P (Y page 167) unless the vehicle is stationary. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. Z Driving and parking when the vehicle is stationary. 158 Automatic transmission Driving and parking A 7 Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. When you switch off the engine, the automatic transmission automatically shifts into neutral N. Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. Gearshifting is determined by: Rthe selected drive program (Y page 159) position of the accelerator pedal (Y page 158) Rthe road speed Rthe Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients G WARNING If the clutch overheats, the electronic management system is automatically deactivated. This interrupts the power transmission. The vehicle may, for example, roll backwards on gradients. There is a risk of an accident. Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator. The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch overheats, a warning tone sounds. All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): the Stop vehicle Shift to P Leave engine running display message appears in the multifunction display. You will only be able to continue your journey once the clutch has cooled down and the display message in the multifunction display has disappeared. AMG vehicles: the Trans. oil overhea‐ ted Drive on with care display message appears in the multifunction display. Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator. Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by: Rdepressing the brake pedal the HOLD function Rengaging the electric parking brake Ractivating Kickdown AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kickdown in temporary manual drive program M. For further information on manual drive program M (Y page 160). Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Automatic transmission Trailer towing is not permissible on the following models: RCLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition RCLA 45 AMG 4MATIC X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, select a lower gear (Y page 171), even if cruise control, DISTRONIC PLUS, or SPEEDTRONIC are activated. i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 160). AMG vehicles Driving and parking Towing a trailer Program selector button General notes The program selector button allows you to choose between drive programs with different driving characteristics. C Controlled Efficiency Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display. i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started. i For further information on the automatic Example: program selector button E Economy Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting X 159 drive program, see (Y page 160). Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display. i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program E each time the engine is started. Z 160 Automatic transmission Driving and parking Steering wheel gearshift paddles : Left steering wheel gearshift paddle (shifts down) ; Right steering wheel gearshift paddle (shifts up) In drive program M, you can change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. If you pull the left or right steering wheel gearshift paddle when in automatic drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S, the automatic transmission shifts into drive program M for a limited time. Depending on which gearshift paddle is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up. AMG vehicles: you can activate drive program M RACE START (Y page 187) using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. i You can only change gear with the steer- ing wheel gearshift paddles when the transmission is in position D. i For further information on the manual drive program, see (Y page 160). Automatic drive program Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterised by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine settings. fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Roptimal Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rsporty engine settings. automatic transmission shifting up later Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher. Rthe Manual drive program Introduction In manual drive program M, you can change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. For this, the transmission must be in position D. The gear currently selected and engaged is shown in the multifunction display. Manual drive program M differs from drive programs E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) and S with regard to spontaneity, responsiveness and smoothness of gear changes. Gear Driving situations = To use the engine's braking effect Automatic transmission To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving: steep mountain roads mountainous terrain Rin arduous conditions Shifting up X Ron Rin 4 Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 160). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): in order to prevent engine damage the automatic transmission automatically shifts up: To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long downhill stretches Rif the maximum engine speed on the cur- rently engaged gear is reached and depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou Activating the manual drive program AMG vehicles: Activating permanently ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- X matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. Press the program selector button (Y page 159) repeatedly until M appears in the multifunction display. Manual drive program M remains active until drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S is engaged. Activating temporarily X Pull the right or left steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 160). M is shown in the multifunction display. Manual drive program M is temporarily active. Depending on which gearshift paddle is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up. Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. i When manual drive program M is activa- ted via the steering wheel gearshift paddles, the temporarily active manual drive program M will be deactivated automatically after a limited time, if the driving situation permits. The automatic transmission switches to the previously activated drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S. When driving on downhill gradients, the temporarily active manual drive program M will only be deactivated if the accelerator pedal is depressed while the vehicle is rolling downhill. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Z Driving and parking 5 161 Automatic transmission 162 AMG vehicles Kickdown ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kickdown in temporary manual drive program M. Driving and parking matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. X i During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. i If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. : Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display. X If the colour in the speedometer multifunction display changes to red and the UP display message is shown, shift up a gear. Downshifting X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 160). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down. i For maximum acceleration, pull the left- hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed. i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Deactivating the manual drive program X Press the program selector button (Y page 159) repeatedly until E (drive program C in AMG vehicles) or S appears in the multifunction display. Deactivating the temporary manual drive program X Pull and hold the right steering wheel gearshift paddle until the automatic transmission shifts into the last active automatic drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S. i When manual drive program M is deacti- vated, the automatic transmission in automatic drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S may shift from the current gear into a higher or lower gear. This is dependent on the position of the accelerator pedal, speed and load. Refuelling 163 Problems with the transmission Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. X Stop. The transmission no X Shift the transmission to position P. longer shifts into all of X Switch off the engine. the gears. X Wait at least 10seconds before restarting the engine. Reverse gear can no X Shift the transmission to position D. longer be engaged. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Refuelling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. G WARNING Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. G WARNING Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch Z Driving and parking Problem Driving and parking 164 Refuelling on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Opening the fuel filler flap ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. Further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 355). Refuelling : ; = ? Switch off the engine. Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap =. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps. X X i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. General notes The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the key. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow To open the fuel filler flap Tyre pressure table To insert the fuel filler cap Fuel type to be refuelled Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. X Refuelling 165 i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the Driving and parking vehicle. Z 166 Refuelling Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING There is a risk of fire or explosion. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and remove it (Y page 147). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not start. The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry. X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 147). X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again a maximum of ten seconds (Y page 147). X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. or The key battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 79). or X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 79). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. key must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the kerb. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Vehicles with manual transmission Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X Apply the electric parking brake. X X Vehicles with automatic transmission All vehicles (except AMG vehicles) X X Apply the electric parking brake. Shift the transmission to position P. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, engage first gear or reverse gear. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission must be in position P and the transmission position display must show P in the multifunction display. Z Driving and parking Rthe Parking Rrelease 167 Parking 168 AMG vehicles: X Driving and parking X X Apply the electric parking brake. Press button :. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. i If you switch the engine off with the trans- mission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open one of the front doors or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P. If you shift the automatic transmission to N before switching off the engine, the automatic transmission remains in N even if a door is opened. The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it from rolling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i The electric parking brake carries out a Electric parking brake General notes function check at regular intervals when the engine is switched off. Noises that occur are normal. G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Engaging/releasing manually Engaging X Push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the ! red indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. i The electric parking brake can also be applied when the key is removed. Parking i You can only release the electric parking brake when the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. Applying automatically The electric parking brake is applied automatically: Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill (vehicles with automatic transmission) or Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary or Rif Active Parking Assist is holding the vehicle at a standstill In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt is Rthe seat belt is fastened. depress the accelerator pedal. If the transmission is in position R, the boot lid must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Ryou Rthe driver's door is closed. have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 3 km/h. Ryou i Ensure that you do not depress the accel- erator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake (Y page 168). not fastened is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. i The vehicle is braked as long as you keep i The electric parking brake is not automat- Ra Rthere ically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Releasing automatically i The electric parking brake can only be released automatically in vehicles with automatic transmission. The electric parking brake of your vehicle is released automatically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe Rthe engine is running. transmission is in position D or R. handle : of the electric parking brake pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle : is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: warning tone sounds Release parking brake message appears Rthe red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. Rthe Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. Z Driving and parking Releasing X Pull handle :. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. 169 Driving tips 170 If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. Driving and parking X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. Driving tips General notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. ECO display The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Consumption can be significantly influenced by your driving style. Example: ECO display The ECO display consists of three bars: RAcceleration RConstant RCoasting The percentage count is the mean value of the three bar values. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50 %. A higher percentage count indicates a more economical driving style. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption. In addition to driving style, the consumption is affected by many other factors, such as: Rload Rtyre pressure start Rchoice of route Rthe use of electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. The evaluation of your driving style takes the following three categories into consideration: RAcceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds - The bar empties: sporty acceleration RConstant (assessment of driving behaviour at all times): - The bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration processes): - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes - The bar empties: frequent braking Rcold i An economical driving style involves driv- ing at a moderate engine speed. To achieve a higher value in the categories Acceleration and Constant Constant: Driving tips the gearshift recommendation. Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E (vehi- cles with automatic transmission). i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the motorway, only the bar for Constant will change. i The ECO display summarises the driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are dynamic changes in the bars at the start of a journey. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For more dynamic changes, perform a manual reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 218). Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle and when towing a trailer. For vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to have selected manual drive program M (Y page 160). i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. i Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on downhill gradients while the manual drive program M is temporarily activated (vehicles with automatic transmission): the automatic transmission may switch back to the last active automatic drive program E or S. The automatic transmission may shift to a higher gear. This can reduce the engine's braking effect. Heavy and light loads G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If heavy demands are made on the brakes, do not park the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed, paying attention to traffic conditions. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surfaces If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after a car wash or after driving through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attenZ Driving and parking Robserve 171 172 Driving tips Driving and parking tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RBrake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. New brake pads/linings New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Driving on wet roads For this reason, drive in the following manner in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which aquaplaning can occur: Rlower your speed tyre ruts Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully Ravoid Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the transmission. If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permissible fording depth in still water is 25 cm Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Aquaplaning G DANGER If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. Ryou Rthe are driving at low speeds tyres have adequate tread depth Driving systems Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. X The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 329). For more information on driving with summer tyres, see (Y page 328). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 328). Driving systems Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. For vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to have selected manual drive program M (Y page 160). By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions are appropriate for maintaining a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in the lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads). Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Z Driving and parking If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. 173 174 Driving systems Driving and parking Cruise control lever You can operate cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, a gear must be engaged. Rcruise control must be selected. X To select cruise control: check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on or off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. X If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed : To activate or increase speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To activate at the current speed/last stored speed ? To activate or reduce speed A To switch between cruise control and var- iable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate cruise control When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. Activation conditions To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe electric parking brake must be released. Ryou are driving faster than 30 km/h. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the selector lever must be in position D. Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically braking the vehicle. i Vehicles with manual transmission: Ralways drive at adequate, but not excessive, engine speeds Rchange gear in good time Rif possible, do not change down several gears at a time Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle Driving systems Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the set speed. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ? to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: press the cruise control lever briefly up : or down ? beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B . or X Brake. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rwhile driving a vehicle with manual transmission, you shift into neutral or depress the clutch pedal for longer than six seconds Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you shift to a gear that is too high, and as a result the engine speed is too low Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, you shift into position N while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐ trol off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. SPEEDTRONIC General notes SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and Z Driving and parking accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. 175 Driving and parking 176 Driving systems steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. For vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to have selected manual drive program M (Y page 160). By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (Y page 177) The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. When the engine is running, you can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed between 30 km/h and the technically permitted maximum speed of the vehicle. If the set value of permanent SPEEDTRONIC is lower then this value applies (Y page 177). i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEEDTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. SPEEDTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Variable SPEEDTRONIC General notes With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed and calling up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed A To switch between cruise control or DIS- TRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on. If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. X Driving systems X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?. The current speed is stored. The multifunction display shows the stored speed, such as SPEEDTRONIC Limit 100 km/h km/h, for five seconds. Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever X up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Switching SPEEDTRONIC to passive If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC is switched to passive mode. The following message appears in the multifunction display: SPEEDTRONIC passive. passive You can then exceed the stored speed. SPEEDTRONIC is activated again if you: Rdrive slower than the stored speed without kickdown Rset a new speed or Rcall up the last speed stored again The SPEEDTRONIC passive message in the multifunction display disappears. Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC by braking. There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Vehicles with manual transmission: SPEEDTRONIC switches off if you shift to a higher gear and as a result, the engine speed is too low. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between Z Driving and parking Storing the current speed You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. 177 Driving and parking 178 Driving systems 160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and the maximum speed (Y page 228). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). DISTRONIC PLUS General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention, DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately to increase the distance to the vehicle driving in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a risk of an accident. Apply the brakes yourself in these situations and try to take evasive action. Driving systems is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and weather conditions or traffic conditions into account. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in the lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads) Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored. This speed can: Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip road so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Rbe Cruise control lever You can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To set the specified minimum distance = LIM indicator lamp ? To store the current speed and calling up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off. Z Driving and parking ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function 179 Driving and parking 180 Driving systems If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selected. X If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow B. LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be running. It may take up to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and the rear doors must be closed. Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must be selected with the cruise control lever (Y page 179). Activating X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ? or press it up : or down A. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS inactive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ? or press it up : or down A. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever (Y page 179) towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Pulling away and driving i The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. There is a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all times. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated when you depress the brake, except when the vehicle is stationary. X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever (Y page 179) towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. The vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. Selecting the drive program DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S or M driving program (Y page 159). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic. If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane (on left-handdrive vehicles) or the right lane (on righthand-drive vehicles). Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Changing lanes If you change to the overtaking lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if: For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. Ryou i After a short period, the vehicle is secured are driving faster than 70 km/h PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Ryou switch on the respective turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision RDISTRONIC by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in Z 181 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 182 Driving and parking front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and: Rthe seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is not sufficient If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. Setting a speed Bear in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the set speed. To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: press the cruise control lever briefly up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. X i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 184). i Make sure that you maintain the mini- mum distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To store the current speed or a lower speed Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X Driving systems Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou apply the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle is skidding Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐ TRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster Displays in the speedometer There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front = and stored speed : light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Z Driving and parking To increase: turn control = in direction ;. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X 183 184 Driving systems Driving and parking Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 223). You will initially see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator: current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend ? Own vehicle In the Assistance menu (Y page 223) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance graphic. X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 223). Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable = Own vehicle ? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated) Driving systems Obstructions and stationary vehicles Other vehicles changing lane DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Crossing vehicles Narrow vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. Z Driving and parking DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. 185 186 Driving systems HOLD function Important safety notes Driving and parking G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by the accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle from rolling away. Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat belt is fastened Rthe electric parking brake is released Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Rthe Activating the HOLD function ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 186). General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Example: vehicles with colour multifunction display Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic transmission: only when the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles with automatic transmission. Driving systems depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. i After a short period, the vehicle is secured by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. RACE START Important safety notes RACE START enables optimum acceleration from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface. Only activate RACE START on dedicated race circuits. i RACE START is only available in AMG vehicles. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated and: Activation conditions Rthe You can activate RACE START if: driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is not sufficient Vehicles with automatic transmission If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. Vehicles with manual transmission The Brake immediately message can also appear in the multifunction display. X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. The HOLD function is deactivated. A horn will sound at regular intervals if you turn off the engine, take off your seat belt or open the driver's door when the HOLD function is activated. The horn alerts you to the fact that the HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. The vehicle cannot be locked until you have deactivated the HOLD function. i Once you have switched off the engine, you cannot restart it until you have deactivated the HOLD function. Rthe doors, the bonnet and the boot lid are closed Rthe engine is running and the transmission, traction control and engine are at operating temperature RSPORT handling mode is activated (Y page 70) Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) Rthe transmission is in position D Rdrive program M is selected (Y page 159). Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Pull and hold both steering wheel gearshift paddles. X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. X Release both steering wheel gearshift paddles. i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START not possible See Own‐ er's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. X Z Driving and parking Ryou 187 Driving systems 188 X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 160). or To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 160). The RACE START available Depress accelerator message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal within a few seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. Driving and parking X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed is increased. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If the brake pedal is not released after a short while, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. Drive program S is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START not possible or RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. i After using it several times in short succession, RACE START will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven. 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Rwhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. Raccelerate less when driving. ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe Driving systems 189 ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if you: : Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side Side view Rswitch on the ignition to position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission Rrelease the electric parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. Rshift Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles Top view The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 300). Front sensors Centre Approx. 100 cm Corners Approx. 60 cm Z Driving and parking manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. 190 Driving systems Driving and parking Rear sensors Centre Approx. 120 cm Corners Approx. 80 cm Minimum distance Centre Approx. 20 cm Corners Approx. 20 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. The gear lever position or the transmission position of the automatic transmission and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Manual transmission: Gear lever position Warning display Forward gear or Neutral Front area activated Reverse gear or Rear and front areas the vehicle is rolling activated backwards Automatic transmission: Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Driving systems 191 Driving and parking Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC : Indicator lamp ; Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Towing a trailer ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Z 192 Driving systems Problems with PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactivated. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 300). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention can assist you during manoeuvring and parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 188). Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the manoeuvring range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with other road users. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Active Parking Assist may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: Rparking or stopping prohibitions Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Runsuitable surfaces Parking tips: Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space. Rparking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. Rparking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 190) warning messages during the parking procedure. Ryou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be cancelled. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces that are: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel straight roads, not bends Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Ron G WARNING If objects are located above the detection range, Active Parking Assist may start to steer into the parking space too soon. As a result, you could cause a collision. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop the vehicle and switch Active Parking Assist off. For further information on the detection range (Y page 189). Active Parking Assist does not support you parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low kerb stone Ryou forward park Active Parking Assist does not support you parking in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a kerb stone parking space appears to be blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe range of movement is too small Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle which is not clearly defined such as a tree or a trailer Rthe Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately Z 193 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 194 Driving systems 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m longer than your vehicle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m wider than your vehicle i In the case of parking spaces that are at right angles to the direction of travel, please ensure that the parking space is long enough to accommodate your vehicle. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. Parking G WARNING Active Parking Assist merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering. There is a risk of accident if you do not apply the brakes yourself. Always apply the brakes yourself when parking and manoeuvring. Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to reverse gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift into position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Release the multifunction steering wheel. Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 10 km/h when reversing. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve the best parking results by backing up as far as possible. When doing so, also observe the PARKTRONIC messages. X X X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park Assist active Engage forward gear Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the Park Assist active Select D Observe Driving systems Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park Assist active Engage reverse gear Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Additional transmission shifts may be necessary. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist switched off message appears and a warning tone sounds. Active Parking Assist is then deactivated. PARKTRONIC is still available. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. X Manoeuvre if necessary. X Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 190). Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also engage forward gear prematurely. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should a gear be changed too early, the parking procedure will be cancelled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when you exit the parking space: Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough. A kerb stone is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is manoeuvred into the parking space. Ra manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 m must be available. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist. X Start the engine. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you are pulling away. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first or reverse gear. Z Driving and parking surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to first gear while the vehicle is stationary. Vehicles with automatic transmission: select transmission position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. 195 Driving and parking 196 Driving systems Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Release the multifunction steering wheel. X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 10 km/h when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear or reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary, depending on the message or requirement. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position D or R when the vehicle is stationary, depending on the message or requirement. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you reverse after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example when you recognise that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space. Cancelling Active Parking Assist You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any time. X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at once. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. or X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the centre console (Y page 191). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately cancelled. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is cancelled automatically if: Rthe electric parking brake is applied position P is selected Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails. The ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Rtransmission Driving systems Towing a trailer For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the minimum required length for parking spaces is slightly increased. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the electrical connection is established between your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking Assist is no longer available. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. Reversing camera General notes technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the reversing camera has been deactivated. If you switch off the engine, the flap will also close. i The text of messages shown in the COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of reversing camera messages in the COMAND display. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 300). Important safety notes The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif Reversing camera : is in the boot lid handle. The reversing camera is an optical parking and manoeuvring aid. It uses guide lines to show the area behind your vehicle in the Audio/COMAND display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. The reversing camera is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap. When the reversing camera is activated, this flap opens. Only once the manoeuvring process has been completed and the reversing camera has switched off does the flap close again. For the boot lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack). Z Driving and parking A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist cancelled message. When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you must steer again yourself. 197 Driving systems 198 Activating/deactivating the reversing camera To activate: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear" function is selected in the Audio system/ COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X Engage reverse gear. Guide lines are used to show the area behind the vehicle in the Audio/COMAND display. Driving and parking X Displays in the Audio/COMAND display The reversing camera may show a distorted view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the reversing camera in the following locations: Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rin close range above the handle on the boot lid Runder ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Function mode display for vehicles with COMAND Online and a trailer tow hitch X To change the function mode in vehicles with COMAND Online and trailer tow hitch: using the COMAND controller, select symbol : for the "Reverse parking" function; see the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. or X Select symbol ; for the "Coupling up a trailer" function (see the separate COMAND Online operating instructions). The symbol of the selected function is highlighted. To deactivate: the reversing camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P on vehicles with automatic transmission or after driving forwards a short distance. Lanes : White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle, vehicle width including the outer edge of the wheel (dynamic) = Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Bumper Driving systems 199 "Reverse parking" function X Guide lines ? Bumper A Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.25 m from the rear of the vehicle Make sure that the reversing camera is activated and the "Reverse parking" function is selected; see the separate operating instructions for the audio system/ COMAND Online. The lane and the guide lines are shown. Reversing straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle C Vehicle centre axis (marker assistance) D Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle The lanes and guide lines are only displayed if you have engaged reverse gear. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. : White lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel straight ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle = Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.25 m from the rear of the vehicle With the help of white lane :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using the white lane as a guide, carefully reverse until you reach the end position. Red guide line = is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. X Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONIC and COMAND Online : Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC and COMAND Online: when PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 188), additional operational readiness indicator ; appears in the COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. Z Driving and parking are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display. Driving systems Driving and parking 200 Turning the steering wheel : Red lane indicating the route the vehicle Driving to the final position : White lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position ; Parking space marking will take with the steering wheel in its current position ; Parking space marking While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until the red lane reaches parking space marking ;. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully. X X Turn the steering wheel to the centre position while the vehicle is stationary. : Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.25 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel straight Reversing with the steering wheel turned : Red lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. = End of parking space X Reverse carefully until you have reached the end position. Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. "Coupling up a trailer" function This function is only available on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch and COMAND Online. apply to objects that are at the same level as the ball coupling. X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer drawbar locating aid = points approximately in the direction of trailer drawbar ?. X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ? touches red guide line ;. X Couple up the trailer (Y page 207). : Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; Trailer drawbar = Ball coupling X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher than ball coupling =. X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar ;. ATTENTION ASSIST General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h to 180 km/h range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Important safety notes : Ball coupling ; Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.25 m from the ball coupling = Trailer drawbar locating aid ? Trailer drawbar A Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" function X Select symbol A with the Audio/COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions for the audio system/ COMAND Online. The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selected. The distance specifications now only ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may not always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration until too late, or may not detect them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rjourney-related parameters, e.g. time of day, length of journey The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Z 201 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 202 Driving and parking Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h Rif you are currently using COMAND Online or making a telephone call with COMAND Online Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed Warning and display messages in the multifunction display Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 225). If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the Attention Assist: Take a break! message appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press the a or % button to confirm the message. X On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts assessing your tiredness again when you continue your journey if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. Speed Limit Assist General notes Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed limits in the multifunction display. Data from the navigation system is also used for this purpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit is detected, it is shown in the multifunction display. If Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic signs, the speed limit from the digital road map is taken and shown in the display. Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs with a camera attached behind the top of the windscreen. : Speed Limit Assist camera Important safety notes Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and does not always detect traffic signs specifying the maximum permissible speed. Traffic signs always have priority over the Speed Limit Assist display. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance by dirt, snow or trees Driving systems traffic signs are poorly illuminated are ambiguous traffic signs, for instance near roadworks or on multi-lane roads Rthere Information in the multifunction display Briefly showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function using the on-board computer (Y page 223). A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit appears in the multifunction display for around five seconds as soon as it is detected. Any other information in the multifunction display is hidden for this period. Permanently showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display Display the assistance graphic using the on-board computer (Y page 223). A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit appears in the multifunction display as soon as it is detected. Traffic sign : indicating a speed limit is generally displayed until: X Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed limit is detected. make a turn. Ryou leave or enter a town. Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway, country road). Ryou have travelled a certain minimum distance without the traffic sign being repeated or detected again. Ryou Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 203) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 205). : Maximum permissible speed (example) ; Maximum permissible speed for vehicles subject to the restriction in the additional sign (example) = Additional character in fog ? Speed Limit Assist is available and switched on Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from speeds of 30 km/h. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper. Z Driving and parking Rthe 203 204 Driving systems Important safety notes Driving and parking G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: Rovertaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rwhen the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Monitoring range of the sensors In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle or a bicycle Rvery wide lanes Rnarrow lanes Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their lane Rbarriers or other road boundaries Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Ra Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side of their lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The radar sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Driving systems : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp If Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up in red. This warning always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Activating Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 225). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. X Towing a trailer If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors. To do so, deactivate Blind Spot Assist if: Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock Rthe engine is not running electrical connection to the trailer has been established Rthe Lane Keeping Assist General notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera : at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and Z Driving and parking Indicator and warning display Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. 205 Driving and parking 206 Driving systems can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. This function is available in the range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly identify lane markings. In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep in lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Rnot G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road Activating Lane Keeping Assist X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the onboard computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 225). If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lane markings in the assistance graphics display (Y page 223) are shown in green. When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. Towing a trailer Notes on towing a trailer Important safety notes G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer combination if it begins to swerve. The vehicle/trailer combination could even overturn. There is a risk of an accident. On no account should you attempt to straighten out the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing speed. Decrease your speed and do not countersteer. Brake if necessary. G WARNING If the maximum the permissible load for a carrier system is exceeded, the carrier could come loose from the vehicle and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never exceed the permissible noseweight when using a carrier. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. Trailer towing is not permissible on the following models: RCLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 45 AMG 4MATIC Exceeding the maximum permissible noseweight of the trailer drawbar on the ball coupling may cause damage to the following: RCLA Ryour vehicle trailer Rthe ball coupling Rthe trailer tow hitch The vehicle/trailer combination could become unstable. If the noseweight used is lower than the minimum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/ trailer combination could also become unstable. Rthe Z 207 Driving and parking Towing a trailer Driving and parking 208 Towing a trailer To avoid hazardous situations: The vehicle/trailer combination: Rmake Ris sure to check the noseweight before each journey. Ruse a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum noseweight. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible noseweight. Rdo not use a noseweight lower than the minimum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight. When reversing the vehicle towards the trailer, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer The applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found: Rin your vehicle documents Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch and the trailer Ron the vehicle identification plate If the values differ, the lowest value applies. You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle under "Technical data" (Y page 364). When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer. heavier restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability Rhas an increased braking distance Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rhas a larger turning circle This can impair the vehicle's handling characteristics. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Maintain a safe distance. Drive carefully. When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer combination. Ris General notes X When towing a trailer, set the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 330). Please note that when towing a trailer, PARKTRONIC (Y page 188) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 203) availability is limited or not available at all. i The height of the ball coupling changes with the load of the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. You will find fitting dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (Y page 363). Driving tips i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilisation (Y page 71). The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permitted speed is. Observe the legally Towing a trailer i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. i Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on downhill gradients while the manual drive program M is temporarily activated (vehicles with automatic transmission): the automatic transmission may switch back to the last active automatic drive program E or S. The automatic transmission may shift to a higher gear. This can reduce the engine's braking effect. Driving tips If the trailer swings from side to side: Do not accelerate. Do not countersteer. X Brake if necessary. X X RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradientclimbing capability, decrease with increasing altitude. Folding out the ball coupling G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, you must fold out the ball coupling. The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side trim panel in the boot. Z Driving and parking prescribed maximum speed in the relevant country. For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technical data" section to find out whether this applies to your vehicle. If you utilise any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer and it will consume more fuel. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. For vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to have selected manual drive program M (Y page 160). 209 Towing a trailer 210 Always engage the ball coupling as described. Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages in a vertical position. Indicator lamp ? goes out. The power socket folds down automatically. The multifunction display shows the Check trailer hitch lock display message until the ball coupling is engaged. X Remove the protective covering from the ball coupling and store it in a safe place. X Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling is clean and that it is either greased or dry (grease free), depending on the instructions for the trailer. Driving and parking X X To open the cover: turn handle : anticlockwise and fold down cover ; and remove it. Coupling up a trailer Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle. X Couple up the trailer. X Establish the electric connection between the vehicle and the trailer. X Check that the trailer lighting system is working. A trailer that is connected is recognised only when the electrical connection is established correctly and when the lighting system is working properly. The function of other systems, such as ESP® or PARKTRONIC also depends on this. X X X Pull out release wheel =. Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise as far as it will go. The ball coupling disengages and folds out behind the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ? flashes. Uncoupling a trailer G WARNING If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged, the trailer can detach. There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses a risk of injury. Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Towing a trailer X engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake. To open the cover: turn handle : anticlockwise and fold down cover ; and remove it. ! Remove the installed adapter cable before folding in the ball coupling. Otherwise, damage may occur to the rear bumper and the adapter cable. Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Secure the trailer against rolling away. X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the trailer. X Folding in the ball coupling G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. Fold the ball coupling back in if you are not using the trailer tow hitch. X Place the protective covering on the ball coupling. Pull out release wheel =. X Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise as far as it will go. The ball coupling disengages and folds out behind the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ? flashes. X X The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side trim panel in the boot. X Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages behind the bumper. Indicator lamp ? goes out and the message in the multifunction display disappears. Trailer power supply ! You can connect accessories with a power rating of up to 240 W to the permanent power supply and with a power rating of up to 180 W to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. Z Driving and parking ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an 211 Towing a trailer 212 The trailer battery may not be charged from the power supply. Driving and parking X To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or 0 respectively. When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer socket is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. The power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. You can find more information about installing the trailer electrics at a qualified specialist workshop. Fitting the adapter ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. ! Remove the installed adapter cable before folding in the ball coupling. Otherwise, damage may occur to the rear bumper and the adapter cable. Open the socket cover. Insert the plug connector with lug : into groove = on the socket. Turn bayonet connection ; clockwise to the stop. X Let the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties. X X Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps i If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an error message may appear in the multifunction display even if there is no fault. The reason for the error message could be that the current has fallen below the minimum of 50 mA. To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failure indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting must be guaranteed a minimum current of 50 mA. Trailer with 7-pin connector General notes Trailer with 7-pin connector: you can connect to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Useful information ............................ 214 Important safety notes .................... 214 Displays and operation .................... 214 Menus and submenus ...................... 217 Display messages ............................. 234 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 263 On-board computer and displays 213 On-board computer and displays 214 Displays and operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 24). Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function restrictions relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 30). Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob. The brightness control knob is on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 30). X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or anti-clockwise. If the light switch is set to Ã, T or L, the brightness is dependant upon the brightness of the ambient light. i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. Coolant temperature gauge G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. Displays and operation Operating the on-board computer On-board computer and displays At high outside temperatures and when driving uphill, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. Overview Rev counter ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Speedometer with segments The speedometer is divided into segments on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 173): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated (Y page 176): The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 178): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. : Multifunction display ; Switches on LINGUATRONIC, see the sep- arate operating instructions = Right control panel ? Left control panel A Back button X 215 To activate the on-board computer: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Z On-board computer and displays 216 Displays and operation Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: 9 : a up the menu and menu bar RScrolls through lists RSelects a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number Press and hold: RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling through the phone book W X RAdjusts 8 RMute the volume Back button % Press briefly: RBack RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC, see the separate operating instructions RHides display messages RExits the telephone book/redial memory % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Multifunction display RConfirms selection/display mes- sage the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station RIn Right control panel ~ RRejects or ends a call telephone book/redial memory RExits 6 RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches Multifunction display (example: vehicles with automatic transmission) : Permanent display: outside temperature or speed (Y page 226) ; Time = Text field ? Menu bar A Drive program (Y page 156) B Transmission position (Y page 156) X To show menu bar ?: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds. Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. i You can set the time using the audio system or COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation, for manual transmission (Y page 155) or automatic transmission (Y page 160) XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 192) ¯ Cruise control (Y page 173) È SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 175) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 115) ¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 150) ë HOLD function (Y page 186) 120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) RAssist. menu (assistance) (Y page 223) menu (Y page 225) RSettings menu (Y page 225) RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 231) The Audio Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and in vehicles with COMAND Online. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND Online. RServ. Trip menu Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip meter : and total distance recorder ; is shown. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" Menus and submenus Menu overview Operating the on-board computer (Y page 215). Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip menu (Y page 217) menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 219) RAudio menu (Y page 220) RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 221) RNavi Example: "From start" trip computer : Distance ; Time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From start or From reset. reset X Z 217 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 218 Menus and submenus The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 218). The From start trip computer is automatically reset when: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. The From reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the approximate range and the current fuel consumption (not for AMG vehicles). X The approximate range that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. Digital speedometer ECO display : Gearshift recommendation, manual trans- Example: ECO display mission (Y page 155) or automatic transmission (Y page 160) ; Digital speedometer The ECO display is not available for AMG vehicles. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. DISPLAY Gearshift recommendation : is not given on AMG vehicles. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 170). Resetting values Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Example: resetting the "From start" trip computer You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip meter start" trip computer R"From R"From reset" trip computer display X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. RECO i If you reset the values in the "ECO dis- play", the values in the "From start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in the "ECO display" are also reset. Route guidance active No change of direction announced : ; = ? Distance to the destination Distance to the next change of direction Current road Symbol indicating "follow the road's course" Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. X In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information, see the separate operating instructions. Route guidance not active : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is announced, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. This shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. : Direction of travel ; Current road Z 219 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 220 Menus and submenus Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation : Road to which the change of direction ; = ? A B leads Distance to change of direction and visual distance display Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction (white) Lane not recommended (dark grey) Possible lane Change-of-direction symbol On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Recommended lane =: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direction and the one after that. Lane not recommended ?: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible lane A: you will be able to complete the next change of direction in this lane only. Other status indicators of the navigation system RO: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. RNew route... or Calculating route: route calculating a new route ROff map or Off road: road the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (offmap position). RNo route: route no route could be calculated to the selected destination. Audio menu Selecting a radio station : Waveband ; Station frequency with memory position The memory position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select Radio; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. If no station list is received: X To select a station using the station search: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. i For information on changing waveband and storing stations, see the separate operating instructions. i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcasting); see the separate operating instructions. Audio player or audio media operation Example: CD changer display : Current track Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select audio CD, audio DVD or MP3 mode; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track : has been reached. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio devices or media support this function. X If track information is stored on the audio player or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Video DVD operation Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select video DVD; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : has been reached. X Telephone menu Introduction G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on your mobile phone and audio system or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Place a mobile phone in the mobile phone bracket (Y page 286), or establish a Bluetooth® connection with the audio system or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. Example: DVD changer display Z 221 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 222 You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPlease enter PIN PIN: the mobile phone has been placed in the mobile phone bracket but the PIN has not been entered. When you enter your PIN via the mobile phone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio system or COMAND Online, the mobile phone searches for a network. RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No service: service there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. i You can obtain further information about suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®: Rfrom any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Ron Accepting a call Example: incoming call X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. You can end or reject a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Dialling an entry from the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. To start rapid scrolling, press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If you do not want to make the call: press the ~ or % button. X Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. Assistance graphic or X If you do not want to make the call: press the ~ or % button. Assistance menu Introduction Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Assistance graphic. graphic X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic. X In the Assist. menu, you have the following options: RShowing the assistance graphic (Y page 223) RActivating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function (Y page 223) RActivating/deactivating ESP® (Y page 224) RActivating/deactivating the distance warning function (Y page 224) RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 224) RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 225) RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist (Y page 225) RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 225) The assistance graphic shows you the status of and/or information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 184) ASSIST (Y page 201) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 205) RSpeed Limit Assist (Y page 202) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST distance warning function (Y page 65) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 67) RATTENTION Speed Limit Assist Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Speed Limit Assist. Assist Z 223 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 224 Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a. When the Speed Limit Assist message function is activated, the assistance graphic shows the Ä symbol. If the Speed Limit Assist message function is activated, a detected speed limit is automatically displayed for five seconds. Other items in the multifunction display are not shown during this time. X If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 267). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 235). Activating/deactivating the distance warning function Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Distance warning. warning X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When the distance warning function is activated, the Ä symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Further information on the distance warning function (Y page 65). Rwhen Activating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Deactivating/activating ESP® Observe the "Important safety notes" section in the description of ESP® (Y page 68). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Deactivating/activating ESP® on AMG vehicles (Y page 70). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 68). X Start the engine. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ESP. ESP X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. Rin X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Collision Prevent. Assist. Assist X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is activated, the Ä symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. X For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 67). Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ATTENTION ASSIST. ASSIST X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, the À symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the multifunction display. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. X For further information about Lane Keeping Assist; see (Y page 205). Service menu For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 201). Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist. Assist X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. X For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 203). When the Blind Spot Assist Sensors deactivated message is shown, the radar sensors are deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 229). In the Serv menu, you have the following options: RCalling up display messages in the message memory (Y page 234) RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 332) RChecking the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 332) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 295) Settings menu Introduction Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keeping Assist. Assist X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X Press a to confirm. X In the Settings menu, you have the following options: Rchanging the instrument cluster settings Rchanging the light settings Z 225 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 226 Rchanging the vehicle settings the auxiliary heating settings (Y page 229) Rchanging the convenience settings Rrestoring the factory settings Rchanging Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or kilometres. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. miles X Press the a button to save the setting. X The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu total distance recorder and the trip meter Rthe trip computer Rthe current consumption and the range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display Rthe Switching the additional speedometer on/off The Dig. speedometer [mph] or Dig. speedometer [km/h] function (vehicles for the United Kingdom) allows you to choose whether the multifunction display in the sta- tus area always shows the speed in mph or in km/h instead of the outside temperature. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Dig. speedometer [mph] or Dig. speedometer [km/h] (United Kingdom) function. You will see the selected setting: on or off off. X Press the a button to save the setting. Selecting the permanent display function You can determine whether the multifunction display permanently shows your speed or the outside temperature. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent display function. You will see the selected setting outside temperature or Dig. speedometer [mph]/Dig. [mph] Dig. speedometer [km/h] (vehicles for the United Kingdom). X Press the a button to save the setting. X i The speed is displayed in mph or in km/h (United Kingdom). Lights Switching the daytime driving lights on/off The Daytime driving lights function can only be switched on with the engine turned off. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. Press a to confirm. Press the : or 9 button to select the Daytime driving lights function. If the Daytime driving lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X X Further information on daytime driving lights (Y page 111). Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Intell. Light System function. If the Intell. Light System function has been switched on, the cone of light and the L symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. When you activate the Intell. Light Sys‐ tem you activate the following functions: tem, RMotorway mode RActive light function RCornering light function RExtended range foglamps If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, the multifunction display shows the Intell. Light System: system inoperative Inactive for left-side traffic or Intell. Light System: System inoperative Inactive for right-side traffic display message instead of the Intell. Light Sys. function in the Lights submenu (Y page 227). Further information on the Intelligent Light System (Y page 114). Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Dipped beams Setting for: function. You will see the selected setting: Rightside traffic or Left-side traffic. traffic X Press the a button to save the setting. If you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is stationary. This function is only available on vehicles with the Intelligent Light System. You can use this function to switch between symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam (Y page 110). If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are unavailable. You can also have the dipped-beam headlamps set for driving on the right/left at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. light +/- function. You will see the selected setting. X Change the setting with a. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to a level from Off to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Z 227 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 228 Activating/deactivating the surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off If you have activated the Surround light‐ ing function and the light switch is set to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the key. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated (Y page 111). Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the boot lid, the exterior lighting goes off after 15 seconds. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Surround lighting function. When the Surround lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated. X Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up: Rside lamps Rfoglamps Rdipped-beam headlamps Rdaytime driving lights Rsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you activate the Lighting delayed sw.off function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lighting delayed sw.-off function. If the Lighting delayed sw.-off function has been switched on, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Vehicle Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can set permanent SPEEDTRONIC using the Limit speed (winter tyres) function. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Limit speed (winter tyres) function. You will see the current setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of ten (240 240 km/h to 160 km/h). km/h The Off set- ting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off. X Press the a button to store the entry. For further information on permanent SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 177). Switching the automatic locking feature on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic door locks function. When the Automatic door locks function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you activate the Automatic door locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of approximately 15 km/h. For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 85). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.). Man.) You will see the selected setting: on or off off. X Press the a button to save the setting. If the radar sensor system is switched off, Blind Spot Assist is deactivated (Y page 203). Heating Auxiliary heating departure time G WARNING When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with: Rhot parts of the exhaust system exhaust gas itself There is a risk of fire. When the auxiliary heating is switched on, make sure that: Rthe Rno flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle components Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the exhaust pipe unhindered Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. Only vehicles with auxiliary heating (Y page 138) have this function. Z 229 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 230 Menus and submenus In the Heating submenu, you can select a stored departure time or change a departure time. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating adopts the THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC temperature setting. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. Selecting the departure time or deactivating a selected departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press a to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select one of the three departure times or Timer off (no timer active). X Press a to confirm. If a departure time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary heating button. Changing the departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press a to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select A, B or Change C. C Press a to confirm. You can now change the departure time. X Press the = or ; button to select the display to be changed: hours, minutes. X Press the : or 9 button to set the selected display. X Press the a button to store the entry. The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary heating button lights up. X Comfort Switching belt adjustment on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt adjustment function. If the Belt adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is shown in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 48). Switching the fold in mirrors when locking function on/off This function is only available on vehicles with a memory function (Y page 107). When you activate the Auto. fold-in mir‐ rors function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. When you unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched on the Auto. fold-in mirrors function and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 105), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. fold-in mirrors function. If the Auto. fold-in mirrors function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Resetting to factory settings Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset all settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit speed (winter tyres) function in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset the Daytime driving lights in the Lights submenu, you must turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. AMG menu in AMG vehicles AMG displays : ; = ? A B X Digital speedometer Gear indicator Upshift indicator Engine oil temperature Coolant temperature Transmission fluid temperature Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program. Upshift indicator UP = fades out other messages until you have shifted up. If the engine oil temperature is below 80 †, oil temperature ? is shown in blue. Avoid using the full output of the engine during this time. If the transmission fluid temperature is below 50 †, oil temperature B is shown in blue. Avoid using the full output of the engine during this time. SETUP : Drive program (C C/S S/M M) ; ESP® mode (ON ON/OFF OFF) or SPORT handling mode (SPORT SPORT) Z 231 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 232 SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the SPORT handling mode. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed. Press the = or ; button to select Interm. Time. Time X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Starting a new lap RACETIMER Displaying and starting the RACETIMER : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap : Lap ; RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. X Press a to confirm New Lap. Lap i A maximum of 16 laps may be stored. The 16th lap can only be completed with Fin‐ ish Lap. Lap Stopping the RACETIMER X Displaying the intermediate time Press the % button on the steering wheel. X Confirm Yes with a. X The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 2 or 3 and then press a to confirm Start Start, timing is continued. Resetting the current lap X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button to select Reset Lap. Lap X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". Deleting all laps Lap evaluation If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. : ; = ? A Overall evaluation : ; = ? A Lap Lap time Average lap speed Lap length Top speed during lap This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. X RACETIMER overall evaluation Total time driven Average speed Distance covered Maximum speed This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown. X Z 233 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Display messages On-board computer and displays 234 Display messages General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function (Y page 186) and parking (Y page 167). Hiding display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, messages for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. messages X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes: currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Rself-diagnosis Rthe is not yet complete. on-board voltage may be insufficient G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X !÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING Z 235 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 236 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete. currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. inoperative See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. T! ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 237 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 238 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 168). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually. Release parking brake The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 168). ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The yellow ! warning lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. or Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency release): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 168). X If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash: Do not drive on. Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 336). X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X X If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency release): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 168). X If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 239 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 240 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red ! indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake Parking brake inop‐ has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. erative The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied or released: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp is lit. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Turn on the igni‐ tion to release the parking brake The red ! indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J Vehicles with manual transmission: a malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. You cannot start the engine. X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). You can restart the engine. J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Brake immediately Check brake fluid level G WARNING Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault. # Check brake pad wear The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 241 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 242 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe front bumper is dirty Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Clean the front bumper (Y page 300). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 70). X Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus inoperative COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is malfunctioning. The distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE Functions cur‐ rently limited See Owner's Manual Adaptive Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe front bumper is dirty function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Clean the front bumper (Y page 300). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 70). X PRE-SAFE Functions limited See Owner's Manual Adaptive Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ü If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle. Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 49). Z 243 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 244 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ý If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle. G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection. This poses an increased risk of injury. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts (Y page 48). Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 49). 6 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Restraint sys. mal‐ G WARNING function Consult workshop The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on occupant safety (Y page 40). 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Front left malfunc‐ G WARNING tion Consult work‐ shop or Front The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintenright malfunction tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. Consult workshop This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shop or Rear right malfunction Con‐ sult workshop G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand windowbag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusLeft windowbag mal‐ ter. function Consult G WARNING workshop or Right windowbag malfunc‐ The left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally tion Consult work‐ or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. shop This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all the LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Left cornering (Y page 117). light or Right cor‐ or nering light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. Left dipped beam or Right dipped beam Trailer left tail lamporTrailer lamp Trailer right tail lamp Z 245 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 246 Display messages Display messages b Trailer left indi‐ cator or Trailer right indicator b Trailer brake lamp b Rear left indica‐ tor or Rear right indicator b Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. X The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Left mirror indica‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. tor or Right mir‐ ror indicator b The third brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Third brake lamp Left brake lamporRight lamp Right brake lamp Left-hand tail lamp/brake lamp or Right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp Display messages b Left main beam or Right main beam Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Number plate lamp Left fog lamporRight lamp Right fog lamp b Rear foglamp The rear foglamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The reversing lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp Reversing light Left tail lamp or Right tail lamp Z 247 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 248 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty. b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The exterior lighting is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left daytime driv‐ ing lamp or Right daytime driving lamp Intell. Light Sys‐ tem inoperative Malfunction See Owner's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. Check the fuses (Y page 322). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as you do so. X If the display message continues to be displayed: X b AUTO lights inoper‐ ative Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Switch off lights Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Top up coolant See Owner's Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 294). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off G WARNING Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. Z 249 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 250 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Rtorn If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X 4 Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 292). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 293). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ç There is very little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. Reserve fuel level Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Replace air cleaner X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ter Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Take a break! During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get enough rest. À Attention Assist inoperative Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Speed Limit Assist is operational again. Speed Limit Assist inoperative ë Off Speed Limit Assist is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 186). Z 251 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 252 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 186). Radar sensor deac‐ tivated See Own‐ er's Manual The radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 229). Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rvisibility Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 167). X Clean the windscreen. X Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe sensors are dirty Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 167). X Clean the sensors (Y page 300). X Restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer. You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Blind Spot Assist inoperative Blind Spot Assist is faulty. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist cancel‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. led X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. You inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the multifunction steering wheel. Z 253 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 254 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 192). Park Assist inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking manoeuvres. ative Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 192). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 178). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS available again DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 178). DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: rently unavailable Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow See Owner's Manual Rthe sensors in the radiator trim are dirty Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 167). X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim (Y page 300). X Restart the engine. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS inactive You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS - - - km/h An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 180). DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Limit --- km/h While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. Cruise control - - - km/h A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 174). 120 km/h! Maximum speed exceeded Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h!. km/h! X Drive more slowly. Z 255 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 256 Display messages Tyres Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tyres or fitted new wheels and tyres. tyre pressure in one or more tyres is not correct. Rthe G WARNING Tyre pressures which are too low, harbour the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 167). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 308). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 332). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 332). Run Flat Indicator inoperative X Rectify tyre pres‐ sure The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 332). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 334). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Tyre pressures which are too low, harbour the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 167). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 308). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 332). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Warning tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 167). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 308). Ryou Z 257 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 258 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre press. moni‐ tor currently unavailable Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative No wheel sensors The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Auxiliary battery malfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Depress brake to start engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D without starting the engine. X Start the engine. X Depress the brake pedal. i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò20 † you can only shift out of position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal. Risk of vehicle rolling Transmission not in P The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). Without changing gear, consult workshop You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X X Depress the brake pedal. Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot drive in Reversing not poss. Consult work‐ reverse. shop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 259 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 260 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Transmission Mal‐ function The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Mal‐ function Stop The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop vehicle Shift to P Leave engine running The automatic transmission has overheated. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the automatic transmission is available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message goes out. X Trans. oil overhea‐ AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated. ted Drive on with Manual drive program M and the temporarily active manual drive care program are no longer available. Engine power output is reduced. X Allow the vehicle to cool down. 4matic currently unavailable 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels. X Drive on. The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly. When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again and the vehicle is driven by all four wheels. 4matic inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. N The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions M The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Close the bonnet. Active bonnet mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to a malfunction or because it has already been triggered. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. j The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Engage the trailer coupling's ball coupling in the end position (Y page 209). Check trailer hitch lock Otherwise, the trailer may become detached. Ð The power steering assistance is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. Power steering mal‐ G WARNING function See Own‐ er's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Z 261 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 262 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 138). X Drive for a considerable distance. The battery charges. The auxiliary heating is operational again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. & There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on (Y page 138). X Refuel at the nearest filling station. inoperative Bat‐ tery low inoperative Refuel vehicle & inoperative See Owner's Man. The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating, waiting several minutes between each attempt (Y page 138). X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Telephone No ser‐ vice Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Top up washer fluid i If, during the winter months, you do not add antifreeze to the washer fluid, it may freeze in the washer fluid container. In this case, the Top up washer fluid display message may appear in the multifunction display. X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 295). Wiper malfunction‐ ing The windscreen wipers are defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Hazard warning lamps malfunction‐ ing The hazard warning lamps are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. + The key needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Key does not belong to vehicle Replace key On-board computer and displays Key 263 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Seat belts Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine starts. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened. Only for certain coun- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). tries: the red seat belt The warning tone ceases. warning lamp lights up after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out. the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat. the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. Z On-board computer and displays 264 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the The red seat belt warn- same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly ing lamp flashes and an driven faster than 25 km/h. intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Safety systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. The red brake system G WARNING warning lamp is lit while Braking efficiency may be impaired. the engine is running. A There is a risk of an accident. warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavailable. Z 265 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 266 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are also deactivated. Possible causes: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete. on-board voltage may be insufficient ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Rthe G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are not available either. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. J÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are not available either. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 267 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 268 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. the vehicle is in motion. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 68). å ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilisation are deactivated. ESP® will not ® stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while G WARNING the engine is running. If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. Reactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 68). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X If ESP® cannot be activated: X M AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations (Y page 70). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 269 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 270 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X 6 The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) is malfunctioning. Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System, see (Y page 41). Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a fault, for example: The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 166). X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level warning lamp is on drops into the reserve range. while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ning. ? The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 271 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 272 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 294). Observe the warning notes as you do so. X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 294). Observe the warning notes as you do so. X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Driving systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed The red distance warn- selected. ing lamp lights up while X Increase the distance. the vehicle is in motion. · You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed. ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately. the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to A warning tone also brake or take evasive action. sounds. Further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (Y page 65). Further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 67). Z 273 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 274 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Tyres Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. G WARNING With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 308). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 332). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 275 Useful information ............................ 276 Loading guidelines ............................ 276 Stowage areas .................................. 276 Stowing and features Features ............................................. 282 276 Stowage areas Useful information Stowing and features i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 24). Loading guidelines G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid. Never drive with the boot lid open. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rnever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Rthe boot is the preferred place to carry objects. Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the boot as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Ruse the lashing eyelets and the luggage nets to transport loads and luggage. Ronly use lashing eyelets and fastening components that are suitable for the weight and size of the load. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp edges for protection. i Lashing material is available at any qualified specialist workshop. Stowage areas Stowage spaces Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Stowage areas Spectacles compartment flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, luggage nets or stowage nets. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the boot. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 276). Front stowage compartments Glove compartment To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. X i There is a pen holder at the top of the glove compartment flap. X To open: press marking :. Make sure that the spectacles compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartment in the centre console Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever To open: press the marking on cover :. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be an ashtray in the centre console instead of the stowage compartment. X Z Stowing and features RAlways store objects so that they cannot be 277 Stowage areas 278 Stowage compartment in front of the armrest (vehicles with automatic transmission) audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the separate Audio or COMAND Online operating instructions). Stowing and features Stowage compartment under the driver's and front-passenger seat Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever X To open: press the marking on cover :. i You can remove the non-slip mat and the insert for cleaning. When removing the insert you will have to overcome some slight resistance. G WARNING If you exceed the maximum permitted load of the stowage compartment, the cover is unable to restrain the objects. Objects may be thrown out of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always observe the maximum load of the stowage compartment. Stow and secure heavy objects in the boot. The maximum permissible load of the stowage compartment is 1.2 kg. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest X To open: on vehicles with moveable armrests, make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost position. X Press button : and fold the armrest up. X i Depending on the vehicle equipment, the armrest can be moved backwards or forwards in a longitudinal direction. i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a USB port or a Media Interface is installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher instead of a stowage compartment, the fire extinguisher is installed under the driver's seat. Stowage areas 279 Rear stowage compartments X X X To open: pull down the top of stowage compartment : by the edge of the handle. To open: fold down seat armrest :. Pull the centre head restraint on the rear bench seat into the uppermost position (Y page 101). i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be an open stowage space above the stowage compartment. Luggage nets Luggage nets are located: Rin the front-passenger footwell the back of the driver's and frontpassenger seat Ron the left and right-hand side in the boot Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 276) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 276). Ron Through-loading facility in the rear compartment Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 276). Slide locking mechanism = in the direction of the arrow. X Swing flap ; fully to the side. Flap ; is held open by a magnet. X To close: swing flap ; in the boot back until it engages. X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary. X Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. Z Stowing and features Stowage compartment in the rear centre console Stowage areas 280 Stowing and features RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. RObjects or loads in the boot cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. X X Fold backrest : forwards. Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. ! Before folding the backrest in the rear compartment forwards, make sure that the rear compartment armrest and the cupholder are folded in. They may otherwise be damaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 276). X Insert the seat belt into seat-belt extender :. Folding the rear seat backrest back Folding the rear seat backrest forwards and back Folding the rear seat backrest forward The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the boot capacity. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. X Fully insert the backrest head restraints (Y page 102). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ; of the seat backrest forwards. The corresponding seat backrest : is released. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 102). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Stowage areas 281 Securing a load Lashing eyelets Observe the following notes on securing loads: the loading guidelines (Y page 276). RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets. RDistribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load. These are only intended as an antislip protection for light loads. RDo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. : Lashing eyelets Stowage well under the boot floor Under the boot floor you can find a bracket for TIREFIT and the vehicle tool kit, etc. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. To enlarge the boot you can remove the boot floor. X To remove: lift the boot floor almost to rain trough ; and pull it out. To insert: place the boot floor at the bottom in the centre. X Hold sides of boot floor = and press in the direction of the arrow until it engages in hooks ?. X Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING When a load is transported on the roof, the vehicle's centre of gravity rises and the handling changes. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the handling as well as steering and braking characteristics are severely affected. There is a risk of an accident. X To open: pull handle : up. Z Stowing and features RObserve Features 282 Always observe the maximum roof load and adapt your driving style. Stowing and features ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is fitted you can: Ropen Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof fully the boot lid fully The maximum roof load is 75 kg. An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. Attaching the roof carrier Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Fold covers : upwards. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Features Cup holders Important safety notes G WARNING The cup holder cannot secure a drinks container in place during a journey. If you use a cup holder during a journey, the drinks container could be flung around and liquid could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could come into contact with the liquid and, in particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You could be distracted from the traffic situation and lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only place containers of a suitable size in the cup holder. Seal the container, in particular when it contains hot liquid. G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, luggage nets or stowage nets. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the boot. ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 276). Features Rfront: capacity up to 1.0 l Rrear: capacity up to 0.5 l Cup holders in the front centre console Two coin holders = and a card holder ; can be found in the cup holder. The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only. X To remove: lift the cup holder up : and out with a brief tug. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. Fold down the rear seat armrest. To open: press the front of cup holder : or ;. Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until it engages. X X Sun visors Overview To fit: insert cup holder : into lateral curved sections ; in the stowage compartment. Simultaneously insert the cup holder in such a way that the wedge of the upper section of the cup holder faces forwards. X Press cup holder : downwards until it engages on the right and left-hand sides. X : ; = ? A Mirror light Retainer Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Z Stowing and features The stowage compartments in the doors provide space for bottles: 283 Features 284 Vanity mirror in the sun visor Rear-compartment ashtray Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. Stowing and features X X Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. To open: pull cover = out by its top edge. To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in the direction of arrow ? until it audibly releases. X Lift insert ; up and out. X To fit the insert: fit insert ; from above into the holder and press down until it engages. X X Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe Example: vehicles with a stowage compartment cover To open: push the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and out. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Ra Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. Features 285 Example: vehicles with a stowage compartment cover Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X To open: push the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X Stowing and features Socket in the front centre console Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover To open: push the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X 12 V sockets Points to observe before use X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as bulbs or chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. Vehicles without a stowage compartment cover X Lift up the cover of socket :. Socket in the rear-compartment centre console i An emergency cut-off ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Z Features 286 X X Pull cover : out by its top edge. Lift up the cover of socket ;. Stowing and features Socket in the boot sion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures: Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle Rthat mutual interference between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones is minimised An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen- erated by a wireless device to the exterior field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial Information on retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) (Y page 352). Rthe X Lift up the cover of socket :. Mobile phone Important safety notes G WARNING Operating mobile communications equipment while driving distracts you from paying attention to traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Use this device only when the vehicle is stationary. i You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communications equipment in the vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so if the traffic situation permits. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discus- General notes There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. You can connect a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone with Audio 20 or COMAND Online via the Bluetooth® interface. This also applies if your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony. More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with Audio 20 or COMAND Online can be obtained: Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect Ron i The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Using a mobile phone If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket, the mobile phone will be Features Operating the mobile phone You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 221). When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone is disconnected from the hands-free system. Active calls will first be transferred to the mobile phone directly. To fold the bracket up: press button :. X To fold the bracket down: press the bracket down and allow it to engage. X Floormat on the driver's side G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. Mobile phone bracket in the stowage compartment You can fold the pre-installed bracket up to improve access to the stowage space beneath it. Depending on the vehicle equipment, a USB port or a Media Interface is installed in the stowage compartment (Y page 278). Slide the seat backwards. To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell. X Press safety catch knobs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat away from retainers ;. X Remove the floormats. X X Retrofitted anti-glare film Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. Z Stowing and features charged and connected with the exterior aerial. X Open the telephone compartment (Y page 278). X Place the mobile phone bracket into the pre-installed fitting; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. 287 288 Features Stowing and features You can obtain information about anti-glare film from a qualified specialist workshop. 289 Useful information ............................ 290 Engine compartment ........................ 290 Service ............................................... 295 Maintenance and care Care .................................................... 297 290 Engine compartment Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Maintenance and care els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 24). Engine compartment Bonnet Important safety notes G WARNING An unlocked bonnet may open while driving and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlock the bonnet while driving. G WARNING When being opened and closed, the bonnet may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons in the range of movement of the bonnet. Open and close the bonnet only when nobody is in the range of movement. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround- ing moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan Rremove jewellery and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts. G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. If you touch the live components, you could receive an electric shock. There is a danger of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operating principle ! An active bonnet that had been triggered must be repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. The active bonnet function will then be available again. The additional pedestrian protection provided by the active bonnet will then be restored. The active bonnet is only available in certain countries. The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injury to pedestrians in certain accident situations. Raising the active bonnet increases the clearance to hard components, such as the engine. If the active bonnet has been triggered, it is raised at the rear in the area around the hinge by approximately 60 mm. For the drive to the workshop, reset the triggered active bonnet yourself. If the active Engine compartment Resetting G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. X X With your hand flat, push down active bonnet : in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows) until you feel it engage. If you can raise the active bonnet slightly in the area around the hinges, it is not engaged correctly. Repeat the step. If the bonnet can then still be raised, drive directly to a qualified specialist workshop. Do not drive faster than 100 km/h. Opening the bonnet G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. Reach into the gap between the bonnet and the radiator trim and press bonnet catch lever ; to the left. X Raise the bonnet. X Z Maintenance and care bonnet has been triggered, pedestrian protection may be limited. 291 Engine compartment 292 When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Maintenance and care Rthe X X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A. Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yellow retaining clip =. Closing the bonnet Raise the bonnet slightly and, at the same time, remove support strut ? from yellow retaining clip =. X Swing support strut ? down and press it into bracket A until it engages. X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Do not press the bonnet closed. Open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force. X Engine oil General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. Engine compartment 293 Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X Adding engine oil Example: vehicles with a petrol engine Example: vehicles with a diesel engine (except CLA 180 CDI model) Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the components that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine. H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. Example: CLA 180 CDI model All models except the CLA 180 CDI: pull out oil dipstick :. X CLA 180 CDI model: release the oil filler cap and pull it out together with integrated oil dipstick :. X ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z Maintenance and care G WARNING Engine compartment 294 Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after missing the change interval required by the service system Rusing engine oil additives ! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with Maintenance and care too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Checking and adding other service products Checking the coolant level G WARNING The engine cooling system is under pressure, particularly if the engine is warm. You could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out when opening the cap. There is a danger of injury. Allow the engine to cool before opening the cap. Wear gloves and protective eyewear when opening. Slowly turn the cap half a turn to allow pressure to escape. ! The coolant level must only be checked and corrected when the engine has cooled down (coolant temperature under 40 †). Checking the coolant level when the coolant temperature is over 40 † can lead to damage to the engine or engine cooling system. Example: engine oil filler cap Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. Top up the engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Make sure that the cap locks securely into place. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 292). X X For further information on engine oil, see (Y page 359). Example Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 40 †. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Service Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. 295 For further information on coolant, see (Y page 360). Topping up the windscreen washer system/headlamp cleaning system G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. G WARNING Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Example To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X X The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windscreen washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 litre, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to refill the washer fluid (Y page 262). Further information on windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 361). Service ASSYST PLUS Service messages The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet). You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 292). Z Maintenance and care X Service 296 The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g.: Maintenance and care RService A in .. days RService A due RService A overdue by .. days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. Only for certain countries: the position after the letter A or B indicates any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed. If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of this display, you will receive a statement on the associated costs. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding service messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages Switch the ignition on. Press the = or ; button to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- ate stops the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Rfor frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods In these or similar operating conditions, have the air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for examRif Care Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. Rabrasive ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Care of the exterior Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions in order to restore full braking efficiency. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Make sure that the automatic transmis- sion is in position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be damaged if the transmission is in another position. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are closed completely. blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off (OFF button is depressed/ airflow control is turned to position 0). Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Rthe You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce Z Maintenance and care ple, changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 297 298 Care wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Maintenance and care Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at wash bays that are specially designed for this purpose. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Relectrical Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. High-pressure cleaning equipment G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the highpressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Care The following cannot always be completely repaired: Rscratches Rcorrosive deposits Rareas affected by corrosion Rdamage caused by inadequate care In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Care and treatment of matt paintwork ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect: rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. RVigorous ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matt finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Maintenance and care Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. X 299 Care 300 Cleaning the wiper blades Maintenance and care G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. Cleaning the mirror turn signal ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres- sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. X ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the reversing camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a highpressure cleaner. Care 301 ! AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes: do not use chrome polish to polish black chromed screens. They will otherwise lose their silky black shine. Rub the screen using a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Commercially available engine oils, WD 40 or Ballistol are suitable oils. Cleaning the trailer tow hitch i The cover of the camera closes automatically when the key is at position 0 in the ignition lock. Cleaning the exhaust pipe Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. X H Environmental note Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a highpressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. ! Please note the care instructions in the trailer coupling manufacturer's operating instructions. Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush. Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :. X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly. X X i Maintenance of the ball coupling and trailer tow hitch can also be performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Maintenance and care Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open the cover of the reversing camera: with the audio system/COMAND Online activated, press the W button. X Select System by turning cVd the audio system/COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Rear view camera and press W to confirm. X Select Open camera cover and press W to confirm. The reversing camera cover opens. X To clean the reversing camera: use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. X Care 302 Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Maintenance and care Rabrasive Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. X Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. X Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning wooden trim and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. i Note that regular care is essential to make sure that the appearance and comfort of the covers are retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, e.g.: Runevenness in structure Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rsubtle colour differences Care temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. These are characteristics of leather and not material faults. leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets X Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or a cleaning agent recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Seat covers from other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at Z Maintenance and care ! To retain the natural appearance of the 303 304 305 Useful information ............................ 306 Where will I find...? ........................... 306 Flat tyre ............................................. 308 Battery (vehicle) ................................ 312 Jump-starting .................................... 316 Towing and tow-starting .................. 318 Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses ................................. 322 Where will I find...? 306 Useful information Setting up the warning triangle i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Breakdown assistance ist workshops: (Y page 24). Where will I find...? X X Warning triangle Removing/replacing the warning triangle To remove: open the boot lid. X Press warning triangle holder : in the direction of the arrow and open. Lift clip = and remove warning triangle ;. X To replace: place warning triangle ; back into warning triangle holder :. X Close warning triangle holder : and push up to secure. X Fold feet = out to the side. Fold side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using press stud :. First-aid kit X Open the boot lid. X Remove first-aid kit :. i Check the expiry date on first-aid kit : at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing items. Where will I find...? 307 Necessary tyre-changing tools can include, for example: Fire extinguisher RJack RWheel RWheel chock wrench The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front of the driver's seat. X Pull tab : upwards. X Remove fire extinguisher ;. i Have fire extinguisher ; refilled after each use and checked every one to two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. : Tyre inflation compressor ; Towing eye = Tyre sealant filler bottle Open the boot lid. Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 281). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 309). X X Vehicle tool kit General notes Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is located in the stowage well under the boot floor. Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kit: the tyrechange tool kit is in the stowage well under the boot floor. For vehicles with an emergency spare wheel, see "Removing the emergency spare wheel" (Y page 350). i Apart from some country-specific var- iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyrechanging tools. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tyre changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. i Towing eye ; is located under tyre inflation compressor :. Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kit Open the boot lid. Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 281). X Remove the tyre-change tool kit. X X The tyre-change tool kit contains: RJack RWheel wrench pair of gloves RFolding wheel chock ROne Breakdown assistance Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit 308 Flat tyre Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: Breakdown assistance RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- acteristics) (Y page 308) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 307) Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain countries) Information on changing/fitting a wheel (Y page 336). X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Place the warning triangle a suitable distance away (Y page 306). Observe legal requirements. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) General notes With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. The affected tyre must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the tyre wall. You will find this marking next to the tyre size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitoring system. If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions in the display mes- sages (Y page 256). the tyre for damage Rif driving on, observe the following notes The maximum driving distance is approximately 80 km when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 30 km when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: Rcheck Rspeed Rroad condition temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/manoeuvres, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from Routside Flat tyre i When replacing one or all tyres, make sure that you use only: Rthe tyre size specified for the vehicle and Rtyre(s) marked "MOExtended" If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tyre). i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist Rthere workshop with regard to their further use. The faulty tyre must be replaced. TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †. G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. Z Breakdown assistance the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. 309 Flat tyre 310 RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Breakdown assistance Using the TIREFIT kit TIREFIT sticker, 2-part Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the luggage compartment floor (Y page 307). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X Remove filler hose B and plug = from the bottom section of the tyre inflation compressor housing. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow cap A of tyre sealant bottle : until the plug engages. X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap A of tyre sealant bottle : into the mounting of tyre inflation compressor ; until the cap and both hooks engage. X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve. X Insert plug = into the socket of the cigarette lighter (Y page 284) or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 285). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Press on/off switch ? on the tyre inflation compressor to ON. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than ten minutes at a Flat tyre If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar, 29 psi) is achieved, see (Y page 311). If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar, 29 psi) is not achieved, see (Y page 311). suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. Tyre pressure not reached H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been achieved after ten minutes: If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved after ten minutes: Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes, the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). X X G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure reached G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. X The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Z Breakdown assistance time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. 311 Battery (vehicle) 312 i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with Breakdown assistance the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery may lead to a malfunction, e.g. a short circuit. This, in turn, may restrict the functions of the safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may then be compromised. You could then lose control of the vehicle, e.g.: Rwhen braking making sudden steering movements and/or travelling at an inappropriate speed. There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or similar situation, inform a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rwhen To remove the tyre sealant bottle from the tyre inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap. X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Further information about ABS (Y page 64) and ESP® (Y page 68). Battery (vehicle) The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when jumpstarting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Electrostatic charge is created, for example: Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothing to friction between clothing and the seat Rwhen you pull or push the battery across carpet or other synthetic materials Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth Rdue G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Service Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the battery yourself, please observe the following: Rswitch off the engine and remove the key. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, you may damage electronic components such as the alternator, for example. Rfirst, disconnect the negative terminal clamp, followed by the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Z Breakdown assistance G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. 313 314 Battery (vehicle) Breakdown assistance The vehicle electronics may otherwise be damaged. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be fitted securely during operation. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. WARNING Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. i When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if the battery was discharged, you will have to: Rset the clock (audio system/COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions). Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 106). Keep children away. Charging the battery Observe this Owner's Manual. For safety reasons, Mercedes–Benz recommends that you only use batteries that have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries have greater impact resistance and as a result there is no risk of acid burns to occupants when a battery is damaged in an accident. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Battery (vehicle) Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. 315 ity. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. G WARNING Breakdown assistance A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstart connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 316). X Open the bonnet. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 316). If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for MercedesBenz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for information and availabilZ 316 Jump-starting Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Breakdown assistance Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting 317 Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RVehicles with a petrol engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jump leads are not damaged. parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. Rthe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc. X Open the bonnet. Rbare Z Breakdown assistance RThe Towing and tow-starting 318 Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back. Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead. beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes. X First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jump leads. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Breakdown assistance X i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING Safety relevant functions are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running brake system or power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system When your vehicle is towed away or towed started, you may require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before being towed away or tow started, make sure the steering moves freely. Rthe G WARNING If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or towstarted is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle: Rthe towing eye could detach itself Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could over- turn. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 354). Towing and tow-starting PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing away a car wash ! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar to the towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: RSecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. RMake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch. RObserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. For towing distances over 50 km, the front axle or the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. The transmission may otherwise be damaged. Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing and tow-starting. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. Vehicles with automatic transmission: when towing a vehicle, the transmission must be in position N. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 Rcannot shift the transmission to position N on vehicles with automatic transmission i Deactivate the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 229). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Deactivate tow-away protection (Y page 73) before the vehicle is towed. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. Z Breakdown assistance ! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST 319 Towing and tow-starting 320 Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye Place the towing eye in the stowage well under the boot floor (Y page 281). X Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: replace the tyre inflation compressor. X Towing the vehicle with the front axle raised Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the front axle raised. Breakdown assistance ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the front axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Example: covers for towing eye mountings Remove the towing eye from the stowage space. The towing eye is located with the vehicle tool kit under the boot floor (Y page 281). Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the towing eye is located under the tyre inflation compressor. X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cover : from the opening. X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. X Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch do not have a bracket at the back for the screw-in towing eye. If you intend to use the vehicle for towing, fold out the ball coupling (Y page 209) and secure the towbar to it. Removing the towing eye Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. X Position the top of cover : in the bumper and press it in at the bottom until it engages. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. or X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Deactivate automatic locking (Y page 229). X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 113). X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and leave the key in the ignition lock. X When towing your vehicle with the front axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 318). Towing and tow-starting i In order to signal a change of direction when towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Vehicles with manual transmission: Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Vehicles with manual or automatic transmission: Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 113). X It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 318). Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Move the transmission to position N. X As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. X The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. Vehicles with 4MATIC may only be either towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position Z Breakdown assistance Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground 321 322 Electrical fuses N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 316). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Do not tow-start vehicles with automatic Breakdown assistance transmission. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 316). Before tow-starting, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe battery is connected engine has cooled down Rthe exhaust system has cooled down When tow-starting, it is important that you observe the safety notes (Y page 318) and the legal requirements in each respective country. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 113). X Fit the towing eye (Y page 320). X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing rope. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage second gear and continue to keep the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Release the brake pedal. X Tow-start the vehicle. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not depress the accelerator pedal while doing so. X When the engine has been started, immediately depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. Rthe Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle and prevent it from rolling away. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. X Remove the towing eye (Y page 320). X Switch off the hazard warning lamps. X Electrical fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Only use fuses marked with an "S". Components or systems could otherwise be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle disconnect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Electrical fuses Before replacing a fuse Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 147). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. X 323 Open the bonnet. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X To open: open clamps ;. X Fold cover : up in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X X The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Rfuse box in the front-passenger footwell The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the front-passenger footwell (Y page 323). Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover :. X Insert cover : at the back into openings = on the fuse box. X Fold down cover :. X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close. X Close the bonnet. X Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. To open: remove the floormat from the front-passenger side. X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the direction of the arrow. X Z Breakdown assistance Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the Electrical fuses 324 To release cover =, press retaining clamp ;. X Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow to the catch. X Remove cover = forwards. Breakdown assistance X i Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the lower right-hand side of cover =. To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side of the fuse box into the retainer. Cover = engages in the retainers. X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audibly. X Fold back perforated floor covering :. X 325 Useful information ............................ 326 Important safety notes .................... 326 Operation ........................................... 326 Winter operation ............................... 328 Tyre pressure .................................... 330 Changing a wheel ............................. 335 Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 340 Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel ................... 349 326 Operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 24). Tyres with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not being used correctly can impair operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about: Rsuitability Wheels and tyres Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rtype When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype G WARNING A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tyres without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tyre. replace the flat tyre with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately Rlegal stipulations recommendations Information on dimensions and types of wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be found under: (Y page 340). Information on air pressure for the tyres on your vehicle can be found: Rfactory Ron the tyre pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 164) Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 330) Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. i Further information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving RCheck the tyre pressures when the vehicle is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust. RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the Operation Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary (Y page 330). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 349). The service life of tyres depends on various factors, including the following: Rdriving style pressure Rmileage Rtyre Regular checking of wheels and tyres Important safety notes on the tyre tread G WARNING G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. Regularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tyres Rpunctures Rtears in the tyres Rbulges on tyres Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 327). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Do not fit any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pressure monitoring systems. Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rsummer tyres: 3 mm tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tyre tread depth is reached. RM+S Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the Z Wheels and tyres wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres checked at a qualified specialist workshop. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. 327 328 Winter operation Wheels and tyres tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. Pay special attention to country-specific requirements for tyre approval. These requirements can stipulate a specific tyre type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. You can find further information regarding tyres at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops or at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 308). ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth. This otherwise significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 349). MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. Only use MOExtended tyres in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitoring system and only on tyres specifically inspected by Mercedes‑Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with a flat tyre (Y page 308). i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 335). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. M+S tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. Winter operation At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 177). When you have fitted the M+S tyres: Check the tyre pressures (Y page 330). Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 331). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 334). X X Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 349). Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are fitted to the rear wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever fit snow chains on the rear wheels fit snow chains in pairs to the front wheels. Ralways ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before fitting the snow chains. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheeltyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre combinations (Y page 340). Ronly use snow chains if the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to fit snow chains. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Rwhen snow chains are fitted, never use Active Parking Assist (Y page 192). i You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 68) when pulling away with snow chains fitted. This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 349). Z Wheels and tyres M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. 329 330 Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres including the spare wheel: Wheels and tyres Rthe Rat least every two weeks the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. offroad driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Rwhen G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of accident. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Operation with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 349). Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre pressure value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap. The table inside the fuel filler flap may state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary; for more information, please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure information label apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for that tyre size. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre Tyre pressure Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1.6 km Depending on the ambient temperature, the speed at which you are driving and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus driving safety (e.g. aquaplaning) Rcause i The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. Tyre pressure loss warning system General notes message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognise the tyre pressure loss warning in the multifunction display in the Service menu, by the Run Flat Indica‐ tor active Restart with OK message. Further information on the message display can be found under "Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system" (Y page 332). Important safety notes The tyre pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 330). The tyre pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressures. An even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning Z Wheels and tyres pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold: 331 Tyre pressure 332 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system If you wish to cancel the restart: Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: or Wheels and tyres Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre pressures are set properly on all four tyres for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap. The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 330). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. X X Press the % button. When the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, press the 9 or : button to select Cancel Cancel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tyre pressure monitor General notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are fitted to all wheels. Information on tyre pressures is shown in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. Yes X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. X Example: current tyre pressure display For further information on displaying this message, refer to the "Checking the tyre pressure electronically" section (Y page 333). Important safety notes It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating conditions (Y page 330). Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must Tyre pressure Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is significantly too low. The tyre pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning. i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes- sage appears in the multifunction display. Further information can be found on (Y page 256). If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take more than ten minutes for the tyre pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. Once the fault has been rectified, the tyre pressure warning lamp goes out after you have driven for a few minutes. The tyre pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a filling station using a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking the tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be shown in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message is shown. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically recognises new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. i If an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may continue to show the tyre pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where Z Wheels and tyres first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tyre pressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre pressure (Y page 334). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. This will ensure that a warning message will only appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 330). The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up, a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunction in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated: 333 334 Tyre pressure the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Warning messages of the tyre pressure monitor If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning light comes on. Wheels and tyres RIf the Please correct tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre is too low and must be corrected at the next opportunity. RIf the Tyre pressure Check tyres message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly and the tyres must be checked. RIf the Tyre pressure Caution Tyre malfunction message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly and the tyres must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tyres" section (Y page 256). you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure values. X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 330). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure for each tyre or the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message. X Press the : button. The multifunction display shows the Use current pressures as new reference values message. If you wish to confirm the restart: X i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are interchanged, for a short time the tyre pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving and the tyre pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. However, Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Changing a wheel Country Radio type approval number Brazil 1489-10-4415 Model: MRXMERCTX1 Dubai TRA, Registered NO 0016161/08 TRA, Registered NO ER0076990/11 Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10 Morocco MR5526 ANRT 2010/ 27/04/2010 MR6706 ANRT 2011/ 17/11/2011 Philippines ESD-1105558C Serbia И 011 12 Singapore Compliance with IDA Standard N0140-09 South Africa TA-2008/1068 TA-2011/1370 Changing a wheel Flat tyre You can find information on what to do in the event of flat tyre in the "Flat tyre" section (Y page 308). Information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre can be found under "Breakdown assistance" (Y page 308). Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tyre, the emergency spare wheel is fitted according to the description under "Fitting a wheel" (Y page 336). Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Interchange front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Interchanging the front and rear wheels of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes when changing a wheel (Y page 335). The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ, depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. Z Wheels and tyres Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor 335 Changing a wheel 336 Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. Remove the key from the ignition lock. If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle, uncouple it. X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle. X X X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. i Apart from certain country-specific variaStoring wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Wheels and tyres Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tyrechange tool kit. For information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Necessary wheel-changing tools may include, for example: Rjack Rwheel Rwheel chock wrench Securing the vehicle against rolling away Fitting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually (Y page 168). X Move the front wheels to the straightahead position. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: move the DIRECT SELECT lever to P. X Switch off the engine. X If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit (Y page 307). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. Changing a wheel 337 Observe the following when raising the vehicle: Securing the vehicle on level ground X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suitable for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and positioning wheel chocks. Never release the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tyres and the ground does not exceed 3 cm. Rnever place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. Rdo not lie under the vehicle. Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rdo not open or close a door or the tailgate while the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Z Wheels and tyres Rto Changing a wheel 338 vehicle has covers fitted next to the jacking points on the outer sills. Steel wheel with hub cap X Vehicles with steel wheels: carefully reach into two of the hub cap openings and remove the hub cap. Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG equipment) AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ; upwards. X Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the tyre-changing tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible. Wheels and tyres X X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. X The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel arches and just in front of the rear wheel arches (arrows). AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the Position jack = at jacking point ;. Example Changing a wheel X Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned vertically under the jacking point. 339 approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. Turn ratchet ring spanner ? until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn ratchet ring spanner ? until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. X Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. X Unscrew the wheel bolts. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and push it on. X X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notices in "Changing a wheel" (Y page 335). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been Z Wheels and tyres The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. Wheel and tyre combinations 340 Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible. X Turn the ratchet ring spanner until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 130 Nm. Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the vehicle again. X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill. X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust accordingly. Observe the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 330). i Vehicles with a tyre pressure control system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. Wheels and tyres X Wheel and tyre combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about wheels, tyres and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. ! Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are marked as follows: Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables: RMO RBA: = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tyres) both axles front axle RRA: rear axle You will find a table with recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see RFA: Wheel and tyre combinations 341 (Y page 330). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 308). i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not Wheels and tyres equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be fitted at the factory in all countries. Z 342 Wheel and tyre combinations Tyres CLA 180 Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 V11 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W11, 12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 Wheels and tyres R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL11, 12, 13, 14 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL12, 13, 14 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y12, 13, 14 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si11 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i11, 13 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 11 Available as MOExtended tyres. of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 13 Not in combination with the Economy package (code 4U3). 14 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 12 Use Wheel and tyre combinations 343 CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition Summer tyres R 15 Tyres Wheels BA: 195/65 R15 91 H15 BA: 6.5 J x 15 H2 ET 47 R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 V11 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W11, 12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 Wheels and tyres R 17 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL11, 12, 13, 14 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL12, 13, 14 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y12, 13, 14 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Winter tyres R 15 Tyres Wheels BA: 195/65 R15 91 T M+Si15 BA: 6.5 J x 15 H2 ET 47 R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si11 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 15 Only for CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition and R 15 steel wheels (code R00) fitted at the factory. as MOExtended tyres. 12 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 13 Not in combination with the Economy package (code 4U3). 14 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 11 Available Z 344 Wheel and tyre combinations R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i11, 13 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 200 Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 V11 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W11, 12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL11, 12, 13, 14 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL12, 13, 14 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y12, 13, 14 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si11 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 11 Available as MOExtended tyres. in combination with the Economy package (code 4U3). 12 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 14 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 13 Not Wheel and tyre combinations 345 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i11, 13 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 200 CDI Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 V11 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 16 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W11, 12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL11, 12, 13, 14 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL12, 13, 14 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y12, 13, 14 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si11 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 11 Available as MOExtended tyres. in combination with the Economy package (code 4U3). 12 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 14 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 13 Not Z 346 Wheel and tyre combinations R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i11, 13 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 220 CDI Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 V11, 16 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W11, 12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL11, 12, 13, 14 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL12, 13, 14 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y12, 13, 14 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si11, 16 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 11 Available as MOExtended tyres. in combination with the Economy package (code 4U3). 12 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 16 Not in conjunction with Sports package (code 950). 14 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 13 Not Wheel and tyre combinations 347 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i11, 13 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 250 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W11, 12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 17 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL11, 12, 13, 14 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL12, 13, 14 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y12, 13, 14 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i11, 13 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 11 Available as MOExtended tyres. in combination with the Economy package (code 4U3). 12 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 14 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 13 Not Z 348 Wheel and tyre combinations CLA 250 4MATIC Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W11, 12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres BA: 225/40 R18 92 W Wheels XL11, 12, 13, 14 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 Wheels and tyres Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i11, 13 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si12, 13 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC Summer tyres R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL12 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 R 19 Tyres Wheels BA: 235/35 ZR19 91 Y XL12 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 ET 48 12 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. in combination with the Economy package (code 4U3). 11 Available as MOExtended tyres. 14 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 13 Not Emergency spare wheel 349 Winter tyres R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 215/45 R18 93 V XL M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 42.5 BA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+S i12 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Important safety notes G WARNING The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fitting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. To prevent hazardous situations: RAdapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emergency spare wheel if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel briefly if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. not switch off ESP®. RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel in question replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre type are correct. RDo When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels. 12 Use General notes i Apart from some country-specific var- iants, vehicles are not equipped with an emergency spare wheel. Emergency spare wheels are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which emergency spare wheels are approved for your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. You should regularly check the pressure of all your tyres, including the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 330). The value on the wheel or as given in the "Wheels and tyres" section (Y page 350) is valid. i If you are driving with the collapsible emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system/tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Z Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel 350 Emergency spare wheel limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. Wheels and tyres Removing the emergency spare wheel Vehicles with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel: The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is secured in emergency spare wheel bag : in the boot. X Open the boot lid. X Release securing straps ; on emergency spare wheel bag :. X Remove emergency spare wheel bag : with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. X Open emergency spare wheel bag : and remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 336). Technical data "Minispare" emergency spare wheel Tyres Steel wheel T 125/80 R17 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 17 H2 ET 19.5 351 Useful information ............................ 352 Information on technical data ......... 352 Vehicle electronics ........................... 352 Identification plates ......................... 354 Service products and capacities ..... 354 Vehicle data ...................................... 362 Technical data Trailer tow hitch ................................ 363 352 Vehicle electronics Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 24). Information on technical data General notes You can find current technical data on the Internet on our Mercedes‑Benz homepage. Technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle in an improper way, its electromagnetic radiation can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if: Rthe RF transmitter is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection aerial This can jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating in the vehicle, always connect the RF transmitter to the low-reflection exterior aerial. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved aerial positions may be used. Robserve Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discus- Vehicle electronics Approved aerial positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear wing ? Boot lid i On vehicles with panorama sliding sun- roof, fitting an aerial to the front roof area is not permitted. On the rear wing, it is recommended that you position the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fitting aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 78 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W GSM/DCS/PCS 850/900/1800/1900 10 W UMTS/LTE 10 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW Rmobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/ LTE) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio/Tetra cm waveband RGSM/DCS/PCS RUMTS/LTE R70 Z Technical data sion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Observe the notes on operating mobile phones (Y page 286). The following aerial positions may be used for the correct installation of RF transmitters: 353 Service products and capacities 354 data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Technical data X Open the front right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. VIN Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold up floor covering : in front of the right-hand front seat. You will see VIN ;. X The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 354). Engine number Example: vehicle identification plate : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) = EU type approval number (only for certain ? A B C D E countries) VIN Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg) Maximum permissible mass of vehicle/ trailer combination (kg) Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the The engine number is stamped into the crankcase. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop. Service products and capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed original container. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. Service products and capacities Service products include the following: Rfuels Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Rclimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Further information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. Tank capacity The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Model CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition Total capacity 40 l or 50.0 l CLA 180 CDI Models with 4MATIC 56.0 l All other models 50.0 l G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. Z Technical data H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. 355 356 Service products and capacities Model Of which reserve fuel CLA 180 CDI AMG vehicles Approx. 8.0 l All other models Approx. 6.0 l Petrol (EN 228, E DIN 51626‑1) Technical data Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using premium-grade unleaded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/85 MOZ, that conforms to European standard EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification can contain up to 10 % ethanol. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear and damage the engine and exhaust system. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol) RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RPetrol with additives containing metal RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by MercedesBenz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. CLA 200, CLA 250, CLA 250 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 93 RON/83 MON. All other models: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON/MON. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Information on refuelling (Y page 163). Service products and capacities ! Premium-grade unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 95 RON/85 MON may be used as a temporary measure if the recommended fuel is not available. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. As much as possible, avoid driving at full throttle. ! Regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also be used as a temporary measure if the recommended fuel is not available. Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel consumption, and the engine power output is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full throttle. If only regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON or lower is available, you must have the vehicle adapted to this fuel at a qualified specialist workshop. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. CLA 250 4MATIC ! Only refuel using premium-grade sulphurfree unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/ 85 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the emission control system. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a MercedesBenz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Always observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Diesel (EN 590) Fuel grade G WARNING If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel. ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that conforms to the European standard EN 590 or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does not conform to EN 590 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the engine and exhaust system. Z Technical data AMG vehicles ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON/88 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. 357 358 Service products and capacities ! Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel Rheating oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do not use any special additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. ! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in countries outside the EU, only use low sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged. Technical data ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with a high sulphur content is available, you will need to carry out your vehicle's oil change at shorter intervals. More information about the interval for oil change can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. Information on refuelling (Y page 163). Low outside temperatures In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the EN 590 standard defines various climatedependent temperature categories. Malfunctions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifications outlined in EN 590. At unusually low outside temperatures, it is possible that the flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from warmer areas may not be suitable for operation in colder climatic conditions. i Further information on country-specific fuel properties and fuel types with low-temperature resistance can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling stations. Fuel consumption information H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road conditions or traffic flow You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low outside temperatures urban traffic Ron short journeys Rin mountainous terrain Rwhen towing a trailer Rin i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emission values of your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures were, in each case, based on the currently applicable version: Rfor vehicles that comply with standards up to and including the EURO 4 standard, in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 Service products and capacities Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. CLA 200 CDI CLA 220 CDI When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 354). The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. MercedesBenz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Petrol engines: in certain countries, different engine oils can be used, provided that the maintenance intervals are reduced. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. MB Approval 229.5 Diesel engines without a diesel particle filter 228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52 MB Approval CLA 180 CDI CLA 200 CDI CLA 220 CDI 228.3, 228.5, 228.51, 229.3, 229.31, 229.5, 229.51, 229.52 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for AMG vehicles. i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add the following engine oils until the next oil change: Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB Approval 229.1, 229.3 or ACEA A3 Rdiesel engines: MB Approval 229.1, 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 This must only be added once and the amount must not be greater than 1.0 l. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Model CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC Replacement amount 5.6 l CLA 180 CDI CLA 200 CDI CLA 220 CDI 6.5 l Z Technical data General notes All models MB Approval CLA 180 CDI Engine oil Petrol engines Diesel engines with a diesel particle filter 359 360 Service products and capacities Model Replacement amount AMG vehicles 5.5 l All other models 5.8 l Additives ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity pockets may form when the brakes are subjected to a heavy load. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescribed intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 354). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at Technical data a qualified specialist workshop. Coolant Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, the faster it flows. Engine oil selection is based on the respective outside temperatures and in accordance with the SAE classification (viscosity). The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during operation due to, for example, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly recommended to observe regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid continuously absorbs moisture from the air. This results in the boiling point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you top up the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. Service products and capacities even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 354). The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for the following: Ranti-corrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation will be approximately 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rantifreeze Rbe at least 50 %. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -37 †. Rnot exceed 55 % (antifreeze protection down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be dissipated as effectively. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked at every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen washer system and headlamp cleaning system Important safety notes G WARNING Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying nozzles could become blocked. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 354). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature. X RDown to Ò10 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 2 parts water. RDown to Ò20 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 1 part water. RDown to Ò29 †: mix 2 parts MB WinterFit to 1 part water. Z Technical data ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, 361 362 Vehicle data i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Model Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Technical data Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tyres - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload. Rvehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 354). Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. Dimensions and weights : Opening height CLA 180 CDI CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC 1749 mm AMG vehicles 1727 mm All other models 1745 mm Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. All models Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2032 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1777 mm Wheelbase 2699 mm Maximum boot load Model 100 kg Vehicle length AMG vehicles 4691 mm All other models 4630 mm Model Vehicle height CLA 180 CDI CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC 1436 mm AMG vehicles 1416 mm All other models 1432 mm Trailer tow hitch Model Maximum roof load CLA 180 CDI CLA 180, automatic transmission CLA 200 CDI CLA 250 4MATIC All other models 363 CLA 180, CLA 250 4MATIC and CLA 200 CDI: For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension including protective covering is 2032 mm. CLA 200, CLA 250 and CLA 220 CDI: For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension including protective covering is 1121 mm. 100 kg Trailer tow hitch Mounting dimensions ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis. RCLA RCLA Technical data Trailer towing is not permissible on the following models: 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 45 AMG 4MATIC Example: anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch : Anchorage points ; Overhang dimension = Rear axle centre line Z 364 Trailer tow hitch Trailer loads Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 8% from a standstill) The CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition and CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC cannot be used to tow a trailer. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Manual transmission Automatic transmission CLA 180 1500 kg 1500 kg CLA 200 1500 kg 1500 kg CLA 200 CDI Automatic transmission CLA 250 1500 kg CLA 250 4MATIC Technical data CLA 220 CDI 1500 kg Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill) The CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition and CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC cannot be used to tow a trailer. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Manual transmission CLA 180 1200 kg CLA 200 1400 kg Automatic transmission 1400 kg CLA 200 CDI Automatic transmission CLA 250 1500 kg CLA 250 4MATIC CLA 220 CDI 1500 kg Permissible trailer load, unbraked The CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition and CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC cannot be used to tow a trailer. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Trailer tow hitch Manual transmission CLA 180 695 kg CLA 200 695 kg 365 Automatic transmission 715 kg CLA 200 CDI Automatic transmission CLA 250 740 kg CLA 250 4MATIC CLA 220 CDI 750 kg Maximum drawbar noseweight ! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load. The CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition and CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC cannot be used to tow a trailer. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Manual transmission CLA 180 75 kg CLA 200 75 kg Automatic transmission 75 kg CLA 200 CDI Automatic transmission CLA 250 75 kg CLA 250 4MATIC CLA 220 CDI 75 kg The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be found on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies. You can attach carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements, on the ball coupling. The maximum noseweight of 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on the ball coupling. Z Technical data Do not use a noseweight of less than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload. 366 Trailer tow hitch Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer The CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition and CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC cannot be used to tow a trailer. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Manual transmission CLA 180 980 kg CLA 200 980 kg Automatic transmission 985 kg CLA 200 CDI Automatic transmission CLA 250 995 kg CLA 250 4MATIC Technical data CLA 220 CDI 980 kg 367 368